Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite™
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Learning System™
Blackboard Community System™
Blackboard Learning System—Basic Edition
Release 7, Application Pack 2
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual (Doc #172002)
Instructor Manual
Publication Date: October 2006
Worldwide Headquarters
International Headquarters
Blackboard Inc.
Blackboard International B.V.
1899 L Street, NW, 5th Floor
Dam 27 2nd floor
Washington, DC 20036-3861 USA
1012 JS Amsterdam
The Netherlands
800-424-9299 toll free US & Canada
+1-202-463-4860 telephone
+31 (0)20 520 6884 (NL) telephone
+1-202-463-4863 facsimile
+31 (0)20 624 3361 (NL) facsimile
www.blackboard.com
global.blackboard.com
Blackboard, the Blackboard logo, Blackboard Academic Suite, Blackboard Learning System, Blackboard
Learning System ML, Blackboard Community System, Blackboard Transaction System, Building Blocks, and
Bringing Education Online are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Blackboard Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries. Macromedia, Authorware and Shockwave are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Real Player and Real Audio Movie
are trademarks of RealNetworks in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Acrobat Reader are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries. Macintosh and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries. WebEQ is a trademark of Design Science, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. JSpell is a trademark of The Solution Café in the United States and/or other countries. Other product
and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. U.S. Patent No.
6,988,138. Patents pending.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. All rights reserved. Made and printed in the USA.
No part of the contents of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without
the written permission of the publisher, Blackboard Inc.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 2 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Table Of Contents
About the Blackboard Academic Suite Instructor Manual
9
Welcome to the Blackboard Academic Suite
9
Courses
Course Menu
Course Map
Control Panel
Course Roles
11
12
14
16
17
Working in the Blackboard Academic Suite
19
Navigation
Language Packs
Quick Edit
Searching for Users and Courses
Entering Text
Visual Text Box Editor
Selecting Dates
HTML Tips
Link to File
Insert Multimedia File
About Spell Check
Using Spell Check
Math and Science Notation Tool – WebEQ Equation Editor
Adding and Editing Equations
Course Creation Wizard
Course Creation Wizard - Course Information
Course Creation Wizard - Course Materials
Course Creation Wizard - Course Design
Course Creation Wizard - Course Menu
Course Creation Wizard – Availability and Duration
Course Creation Wizard - Course Enrollment
21
22
24
25
26
28
35
36
39
40
43
44
46
47
48
50
51
52
54
55
57
Content
58
Content Areas
Course Content
Items
File Attachments
Add SCORM, IMS, and NLN Content
Folders
Content Metadata
External Links
Course Link
Learning Units
Managing Tests
About Test Options
Assignments
60
61
64
67
70
74
75
77
78
79
80
82
86
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 3 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Tool Linking
Copy and Move Content
The Open Standards Content Player
Syllabus
Adaptive Release
Adaptive Release Functions
Adaptive Release Criteria
Review Status
User Progress
Performance Dashboard
Statistics Tracking
87
88
89
91
94
96
99
104
106
107
109
Course Tools
111
Course Announcements
Add or Modify Announcement
Staff Information
Add or Modify Profile
Calendar
Add or Modify Calendar Event
Calendar Quick Jump
Tasks
Add or Modify Task
Send Email
Compose and Send an Email
Digital Drop Box
Add File to the Digital Drop Box
Send File from the Digital Drop Box
Glossary Manager
Add Glossary Term
Download Glossary
Upload Glossary
Messages
112
113
115
116
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
134
Collaboration Tools
135
Collaboration Tools
Collaboration Sessions
Create/Modify Collaboration Session
Virtual Classroom
Menu Bar
Classroom Tool box
Whiteboard
Group Browser
Content Map
Ask Question
Question Inbox
Chat
Private Messages
User Information
136
138
140
141
142
143
144
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 4 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Record Menu
Session Recordings
Recording Properties
153
154
155
Discussion Board
156
About the Discussion Board
View and Organize Discussion Board Content
Initiate a Thread
Respond to a Discussion Board Post
Grading Discussion Board Participation
Peer Review Through the Discussion Board
Keeping the Discussion Board Content Safe
Delegating Discussion Board Administration
Incorporating Discussion Board Forums into the Learning Process
Discussion Board Statistics
157
159
162
163
164
166
167
169
170
171
Course Options
172
Manage Course Menu
Add New Content Area
Add New Tool Area
Add New Course Link
Add External Link
Course Design
Course Banner
Manage Tools
Enable Blackboard Tools
Enable Building Blocks Tools
Enable Content Types
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
179
181
182
183
Course Settings
184
Course Name and Description
Course Availability
Guest Access
Observer Access
Course Duration
Enrollment Options
Categorize Course
Set Course Entry Point
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
Copy, Import, Archive and Recycle
193
Recycle Course
Copy Course
Copy Course Materials into a New Course
Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course
Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy)
Import Package
Export / Archive Manager
Export Course
194
195
196
199
203
204
207
208
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 5 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Archive Course
210
Course Cartridges
211
Import Course Cartridge
About Chalk Titles
Manage Chalk Titles
212
214
216
User Management
216
List/Modify Users
Change Password
Create User and Modify User
Batch Create Users for Course Page
Enroll User
Remove Users from the Course
Manage Groups
Add Group / Group Properties
Modify Group
Add Users to Group
List Users in Group
Remove Users from Group
218
219
220
223
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
Assessment
232
About Assessments
Test Manager
How to Create or Modify a Test
Test Info
Test Canvas
Test Creation Settings
Question Completion Status
Question Metadata
Multiple Choice Questions
True/False Questions
Multiple Choice Questions
Fill in the Blank Questions
Multiple Answer Questions
Matching Questions
Ordering Questions
Essay Questions
Calculated Formula Questions
Calculated Numeric Response Questions
File Response Questions
Hot Spot Questions
Fill In Multiple Blanks Questions
Jumbled Sentence Questions
Opinion Scale/Likert Questions
Short Answer Questions
Either/Or Questions
Quiz Bowl Questions
235
237
239
240
241
243
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 6 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Add/Modify Random Block
Upload Questions
Search Pools and Assessments
Survey Manager
Pool Manager
Pool Import
266
267
270
271
272
274
Gradebook
274
Gradebook
Add/Modify Gradebook Item
Manual Grades
Manage Items
Spreadsheet Settings
Manage Categories
Create/Modify Item Category
Manage Display Options
Create/Modify Grade Display Options
Weight Grades
Calculating Total and Weighted Total in the Gradebook
Download Gradebook
Upload Gradebook
Choose Column to Import: Items
Choose Column to Import: Students
Modify Grade: Assessment
Grade Assessment
Item Options: Tests and Surveys
View Item Grades
View Item Detail
Assessment Stats
Download Assessment Results
Modify Grades: Assignment
Grade Assignment
Item Options: Assignments
Download Assignment
Delete Assignment Files
User Options
View User Information
View User Grades
View User Detail
Gradebook Views
View Grades by Gradebook Item
View Grades by User
Course Statistics
277
279
281
283
284
285
286
287
289
290
292
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
311
312
312
313
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
Early Warning System
321
Introduction to the Early Warning System
Manage Early Warning System Rules
Review Alerts and Notify Users
322
323
325
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 7 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Organizing and Managing Content
326
Organize Content in Folders
Organize Folder Permissions
Tools for sharing and finding content
Organize Course folders
327
329
330
332
Using Content System Content
333
Add Content System Items to a Course
Add Portfolios to a Course
Course Link Checker
Copy Files to the Content Collection
Content System Items during Export/Import and Archive/Restore
Course Copy and Content System Items
335
337
339
340
345
346
Using Library content
347
Library Areas
eReserve folders
Add Library Content to Courses
348
349
350
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 8 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ABOUT THE BLACKBOARD ACADEMIC SUITE INSTRUCTOR MANUAL
Overview
The Instructor Manual provides detailed information about building and managing courses on the
Blackboard Learning System. The Blackboard Community System offers the same set of functions
and features for managing an Organization.
How the manual is organized
The Blackboard Academic Suite Instructor Manual begins by reviewing the teaching and learning
environment for Instructors. The bulk of the manual details the functions available to Instructors
through the Control Panel.
Manual Conventions
To make this manual easier to use a number of conventions have been put in place.
S YMBOL
D ESCRIPTION
Bold type
A button or field name.
Courier font
Text that users should type.
Italics in a title
Additional information in a title that may not be included on the
Web page.
[r]
Required field
Using this manual
This manual should be read as a reference guide. Do not read this manual from cover to cover.
Manual Updates
Please note that this manual is updated periodically. Check the Date of Last Revision at the
beginning of the manual to ensure that it is the most recent copy.
The HTML version is available by clicking Online Admin Manual from the Control Panel and at
http://www.blackboard.com/products/services/support. This site also includes the manual in PDF
format.
To report any comments or suggestions regarding this manual, please contact Blackboard Support.
WELCOME TO THE BLACKBOARD ACADEMIC SUITE
Introduction
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 9 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
The following are some things to keep in mind when using the Blackboard Academic Suite:
Certain tools may not be documented.
System Administrators have the ability to disable certain tools within the application. If you
encounter tools that you are unable to access contact your System Administrator.
The openness of the Blackboard Academic Suite allows Instructors and Administrators to be very
creative. The names for items in the Blackboard Academic Suite may differ from those in the
documentation.
Building Blocks allows institutions to integrate external applications, tools, content, and services
into the Blackboard Academic Suite.
The Blackboard environment
The Blackboard environment includes a header frame with images and buttons customized by the
System Administrator and tabs that navigate to different areas. Clicking on a tab will open that area
in the content frame.
Header frame
The header frame contains navigation buttons that allow the user to access the institution home
page, access the help, and logout.
Tabs
Blackboard Learning System and Blackboard Learning System–Basic Edition include two common
tabs for users:
My Institution: The My Institution tab contains tools and information specific to each user’s
preferences. Tools and information are contained in modules. Users can add and remove modules
from their My Institution tab. The System Administrator may restrict access to or require specific
modules.
Courses: Users click on a link from the Courses tab to access a Course.
Users also have access to the following tabs with the Blackboard Community System:
Community: The Community tab lists Organizations specific to each user, the Organization
Catalog for the institution, and institution Discussion Boards. Users click on a link from the
Community tab to access an Organization.
Services: The Services tab contains links to other institutional offerings outside of the Blackboard
Learning System. The links are set by the System Administrator.
In addition, the Blackboard Community System enables the institution to create custom tabs and
present different tabs to users based on Institution Roles.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 10 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSES
Overview
Courses contain content and tools for teaching and learning. The Instructor assigned to a Course
oversees the course through the Control Panel. While the Instructor has control over the Course,
the Administrator can set overrides that restrict or require course areas and tools.
A Course consists of the Course Menu and a content frame. The Course Menu links users to
content and tools. The content frame displays content and tools.
Organization Web Sites
Organization Web sites function in the same way as Courses. The Organization Manager uses the
same Control Panel that appears in Courses to provide an online environment for the organization.
Organizations are only available with the Blackboard Community System.
Functions
The table below includes information on the components of a Course. The names of the areas can
be changed by the Instructor or the System Administrator.
A RE A
D ESCRIPTION
Announcements
Announcements post timely information critical to course
success. Click Announcements from the Course Menu
to view Announcements.
Staff Information
Staff Information provides background and contact
information on Instructors and Teaching Assistants.
Course areas
Course areas can contain a wide-range of content items
including: Assessments, Assignments, Learning Units,
and multimedia files.
Communication
The Communication area allows users to:
•
send and receive messages
•
open Discussion Boards
•
enter the Virtual Classroom
•
view roster
•
view Group pages
External Links
External Links connect users to learning materials outside
of the Blackboard Academic Suite.
Tools
Tools that can be used in the Course. These include:
Digital Drop Box, Edit Home Page, Personal Information,
Calendar, View Grades, Student Manual, Tasks, The
Electric Blackboard®, and Address Book.
Course Map
Navigate through a collapsible tree directory.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 11 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE MENU
About the Course Menu
The Course Menu appears on the left side of a course and contains links to materials and tools
within the course. The Instructor can customize the appearance of the Course Menu and the
content and tools available to users.
Two views may be made available to users; if both views are available users may toggle between
them:
•
Quick View – Displays top-level of course materials. Links may be displayed as buttons or
text.
•
Detail View – Displays course materials as seen in the Course Map. This view expands to
show the hierarchy of course navigation.
A Tools Panel appears as part of the Course Menu. This box may contain links to the Course Map,
Communication tools and/or Course Tools. Links to tools may also be added to the main part of the
Course Menu so they appear in the Detail View or the Course Map.
The size of the Course Menu frame may be adjusted. Hold the mouse over the border that marks
the right side of the Course Menu, an arrow pointer appears. Use the mouse to drag this border
and expand or contract the frame.
Information about when the Course Menu was last refreshed is also available in the Course Menu.
Hold the mouse over the Refresh icon to view the date and time the menu was last refreshed. In
the Detail View the date and time information appears at the bottom.
View new Content
When content is added to the Course Menu or the Course Map it takes 20 minutes for it to cache;
this means that new content in the Course Menu and Course Map does not appear for 20 minutes.
To view content within the first 20 minutes it has been added click Refresh.
Set up Menu display options
The Instructor can make the Quick View and/or the Detail View available within a course. Follow
the steps below to change the view:
1.
Select Course Design on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage on the Course Design page.
3.
Select a default view for the Course Menu.
Note: Administrators control the default of the Course Menu for the
entire system. This does not limit the Instructors ability to make
changes within their courses; it only dictates the appearance of the
default Course Menu.
Note: The Course Map may appear with a different color scheme
when accessed from Quick View. When Quick View uses text links
(not buttons) the color of the links may be modified. If the color is
modified, the color of items in the Course Map will appear the same
as the text links.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 12 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Set up Tool box display
The Tools Panel may be set to display links to Course Tools, Communication tools, and/or the
Course Map. The display of the Tools Panel is managed separately for the Detail View and the
Quick View. This allows Instructors to set up the Tools Panel differently in the two separate views.
Follow the steps below to set up the Tools Panel display for the Quick View:
1.
Select Course Design on the Control Panel
2.
Select Manage Tool Panel on the Course Design page.
3.
Select Quick View Tool Panel Options or Detail View Tool Panel Options on the
Manage Tool Panel page.
4.
Select which links to display in the box and enter a name to appear in the header. If no
options are selected, the Tools Panel does not appear in the Course Menu. If Header
Name is left blank, no header appears in the Tools panel. The background and text color
for the header may also be selected.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 13 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE MAP
About the Course Map
The Course Map is a collapsible tree directory that is used for navigation within a course. The
Course Map may be viewed from the Course menu, Collaboration Sessions, the Performance
Dashboard and as a selection window.
Information about when the Course Map was last refreshed is also available at the bottom of the
map.
View the Course Map from the Course Menu
The Course Map may be opened from the Display View and the Quick View of the Course Menu.
Select Course Map in the Tools Panel on the Course Menu to open the Course Map. All available
content and tools appear within the Course Map.
When the Course Map is viewed from the Course Menu, the Instructor views the course content as
a user. For example, if an item is made available to a group through an Adaptive Release rule, and
the Instructor is not part of the Group, the item will not be visible to the Instructor through the
Course Map.
View the Course Map from the Performance Dashboard
When the Course Map is viewed from the Performance Dashboard, the availability of items, tools,
and Review Status for the specific user is displayed.
Select the icon in the Adaptive Release column to view the Course Map for a specific user. The
availability of each item and the Review Status for the user selected is indicated.
This following table includes a description of the icons used in the Performance Dashboard:
A D APTIVE R ELEASE
AND
R EVIEW S TATUS
ICONS :
Visible – this item is visible to that course user.
Invisible – this item is not visible to that course user.
Reviewed – this item has been marked as Reviewed by the course user.
Not Reviewed – this item is displayed as Mark Reviewed to the course user.
View the Content Map from a Virtual Classroom
The Content Map is similar to the Course Map, except the tree directory only displays available
Content Areas; it does not allow users to navigate to other course areas, such as tools. To open
the Content Map, select Content Map in the Classroom Tool box of a Virtual Classroom.
Use the Course Map as a selection window
Course areas and items may be linked to from different pages within a course, such as the Add
Announcement page and Add Course Link page. This selection process uses the Course Map,
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 14 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
accessed by selecting the Browse button. The Course Map, accessed from these pages, displays
all content items within a course. Click a link in the Course Map to select an item or tool.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 15 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CONTROL PANEL
Overview
All course administration is done through the Control Panel. This area is only available to users
with one of the following defined course roles:
•
Instructor
•
Teaching Assistant
•
Grader
•
System Administrator
Find the Control Panel
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Control Panel on the Course Menu.
Functions
The Control Panel is comprised of six areas:
P ART
F UNCTION
Content Areas
Provides the tools necessary to add text, files, and information
into a course.
Course Tools
Contains the communication tools to send email, create tasks,
and work with groups.
Course Options
Contains security and customization options.
User Management
Provides tools to manage users and enrollments.
Assessment
Provides tools for building Assessments, Recording grades,
and tracking user activity.
Support
Offers support contacts and online documentation.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 16 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE ROLES
Overview
Course Roles control access to the content and tools within a course. Each user is assigned a role
for each Course in which they participate. For example, a User with a role of Teaching Assistant in
one Course can have a role of Student in another Course.
The Course Role is set when a User is enrolled. It can also be modified after enrollment from the
Control Panel.
•
Course Roles include:
•
Course Builder
•
Grader
•
Guest
•
Instructor
•
Student
•
Teacher’s Assistant
Note: Administrators may modify the privileges associated with different
Course Roles. Therefore, all of the privileges listed may not apply.
Administrators also have the option to change the names of Course
Roles.
Course Builder
The Course Builder role has access to most areas of the Control Panel. This role is appropriate for
a user to manage the course without having access to Student grades.
Note: A Course Builder can still access the course if the course is
unavailable to Students. A Course Builder cannot remove an Instructor
from a Course.
Course Builders have access to the following areas of the Control Panel:
•
*Course Information
•
Settings
•
*Course Documents
•
Import Course Cartridge
•
*Assignments
•
Import Package
•
*External Links
•
*Resources
•
*Announcements
•
Course Copy
•
*Course Calendar
•
Export Course
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 17 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
•
*Staff Information
•
List / Modify Users
•
*Tasks
•
Create User
•
*Discussion Boards
•
Batch Create Users for
Course
•
*Send Email
•
Enroll User
•
*Collaboration
•
Remove Users from the
Course
•
*Digital Drop Box
•
*Manage Groups
•
Manage Course Menu
•
*Test Manager
•
Archive Course
•
*Survey Manager
•
Recycle Course
•
*Pool Manager
•
*Manage Tools
•
* Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified by the Administrator. These privileges will
always be available for this Course Role.
Grader
A Grader assists the Instructor in the creation, management, delivery, and grading of Assessments.
A Grader also assists the Instructor with managing the Gradebook.
Note: A Grader cannot access a course if it is unavailable to Students.
Graders have access to the following areas of the Control Panel:
•
*Announcements
•
*Survey Manager
•
*Course Calendar
•
*Pool Manager
•
*Digital Drop Box
•
*Gradebook
•
List/Modify Users – may
not modify content
•
*Gradebook Views
•
*Test Manager
•
*Course Statistics
* Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified by the Administrator. These privileges will
always be available for this Course Role.
Guest
Users with the role of Guest have no access to the Control Panel. Areas within the course can be
made available to Guests.
Visitors such as prospective students, alumni or parents may be given the role of Guest.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 18 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Instructor
Instructors have access to all areas in the Control Panel. This role is generally given to those
developing, teaching or facilitating the class. Instructors may still access a course that is
unavailable to Students.
Administrators may limit access to the following features:
•
List / Modify Users
•
Course Copy
•
Create User
•
Recycle Course
•
Batch Create Users for
Course
•
Import Course Cartridge
•
Remove Users from the
Course
•
Export Course
•
•
Archive Course
Enroll User
•
•
Manage Course Menu
Settings
Student
Student is the default Course Role. Students have no access to any areas on the Control Panel.
Teaching Assistant
Teaching Assistants have access to most features. If the course is unavailable to Students,
Teaching Assistants may still access the course. Teaching Assistants are not listed in the Course
Catalog listing for the course.
Note: A Teaching Assistant cannot remove an Instructor from a course.
WORKING IN THE BLACKBOARD ACADEMIC SUITE
Overview
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 19 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
This chapter discusses how to navigate and enter text in the Blackboard Academic Suite.
In this chapter
This chapter includes the following topics.
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
Navigation
Describes how to move throughout the Blackboard Academic
Suite.
Language Packs
Explains how Language Packs are used to present information
using different languages and cultural norms.
Quick Edit
Explains how to edit a course from within the view.
Searching for
Users and
Courses
Explains how to locate records in the system.
Entering Text
Describes how to input information.
Text Box Editors
Describes how to Input information using the Text Box Editor.
Link to File
Explains how to add a link to a file.
Insert Multimedia
File
Explains how to add a multimedia file.
About Spell Check
Describes the Spell Check feature.
Using Spell Check
Explains how to use the Spell Check feature.
Math and Science
Notation Tool
Describes the Math and Science Notation Tool – WebEQ
Editor.
Adding and Editing
Equations
Explains how to add and modify equations on the Math and
Science Notation Tool.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 20 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
NAVIGATION
Overview
Only the material in the content frame changes when moving to a new area or page. The tabs and
header frame are always available for quick access to those navigation features.
N AVIG ATION T OOL
D ESCRIPTION
Tab
Click a tab to open it.
Button
Click a button to navigate to a page
within the Blackboard Academic Suite.
Some buttons also lead to areas outside
of the Blackboard Academic Suite.
Buttons also execute functions.
Link
Click a hypertext link to access another
Web page within the Blackboard
Academic Suite. Links can also open
Web sites outside of the Blackboard
Academic Suite.
Path
Click one of the hypertext links that
appear in the navigation path to access
that page. The navigation path appears
at the top of pages to return to the
previous page that led to the current
page.
Linking to a Course
To link to a Course, copy the URL from the address bar in the Web. Links to Courses can be
posted inside or outside the Blackboard Academic Suite. Users will be prompted for authorization
before accessing the Course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 21 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
LANGUAGE PACKS
About Language Packs
Language Packs present the Blackboard Academic Suite using language and cultural norms
matched to different audiences. Language Pack preferences are defined at the system level, the
course or organization level, and finally at the user level.
At the system level, the Administrator defines one language pack as the system default. This is the
language pack that appears when no other language pack are specified at the course level or at
the user level.
At the course level, the Instructor can set a language pack and enforce it. Enforcing a language
pack means that all users will see that language pack. If the language pack is not enforced, and a
user has a preferred language pack associated with their account, the user’s language pack will
override the course language pack.
At the user level, individuals may select their preferred language pack .
Note: Customized names, such as changing the name of a Content
Area, are not changed with the language pack . These values stay the
same through all language packs. The default names in the system are
translated and appear differently in each language pack.
Set a Locale for a Course
Follow these steps to set a locale for a course.
1.
Click Settings from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Set Language Pack.
3.
Select a language pack from the drop-down list.
4.
Click Enforce Language Pack to always display this course in the selected language
pack .
5.
Click Submit.
If a language pack is not chosen for a course the course will display in the user’s preferred
language pack or, if the user has not set a preferred language pack , the system default language
pack .
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 22 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Course Areas not Impacted by Language Pack Selections
For the most part, the Control Panel appears in the selected language pack of a course; it does not
appear in the language pack selected for the user. In a few spots within a course, the page will
display using the system default or the user’s preferred language pack rather than the course
language pack . The following pages will not display in the selected course language pack:
•
Control Panel > Course Information > Modify Item, Copy Item, Add Item, Remove Item
•
Control Panel > Copy Files to CS
•
Control Panel > Discussion Board > Add Forum
•
Control Panel > Announcements > Confirmation receipt.
Spell Check and Language Packs
The Spell Check tool supports American English, Great Britain English, French, and Spanish. The
Spell Check tool will not work with other language packs. If Spell Check does not recognize the
language pack it will use a supported dictionary.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 23 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
QUICK EDIT
Overview
Quick Edit allows Instructors to make changes to content from within the course view instead of
navigating through the Control Panel to edit content. When an Instructor is viewing the course
through the Student view, they may use this shortcut to edit course content, without going through
the Control Panel. Quick Edit controls appear in the navigation bar in each Course area and any
subfolders. System Administrators may disable this feature.
NOTE: The Edit View link is displayed to users with a role of Instructor, TA,
Course Builder, or System Administrator. Due to the size of the content
editing pages, this method of editing is not recommended with an 800x600
screen resolution.
Functions
Select Edit View to open and edit the Course area or Content Item. A Display View link appears in
the top right corner of the Control Panel view of the content page. Select Display View to go back
to the course display view of the same content page. Instructors may use Edit View and Display
View to toggle back and forth between the edit view and display view of course content.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 24 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SEARCHING FOR USERS AND COURSES
Overview
There are several areas in the Blackboard Academic Suite where users can search for other users.
User search options
The table below details the available user search options. All options are not available in all search
boxes.
TO . . .
search for a user using last
name or Username
THEN
...
1.
Select the Search tab.
2.
Enter either a last name or a Username.
3.
Select either the Last Name or Username
option. All matching entries will be displayed.
search for a group of last
names or Usernames that
start with a particular letter
or number
1.
Select the A-Z, 0-9 tab.
2.
Click on the first letter of the last name or on
the first number of the Username. All matching
entries will be displayed.
search using a value found
in the user’s name
1.
Select the Advanced tab.
2.
Enter a value in the Containing field.
3.
The search will return all users with that value
in their Username.
4.
Click the check boxes and select values from
the drop-down list to narrow the search.
1.
Select the tab.
2.
Click List All to list all the names enrolled. All
entries will be displayed.
list all users
Course search options
The following options are available when searching for a course:
•
Search: The search parameters on this tab can be used separately or in tandem to further
narrow the list generated. To use this tab: Click the Course ID, Instructor, or
Title/Description option. Enter a value in the field. Then click the All Courses, Month, or
Day option to define the list based on when the courses where created. The search
function will create a list of courses with that value created in the time selected.
•
A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a Course ID. A list
of all courses with an ID that begins with that character will appear.
•
List All: Click List All to view all the courses on the system.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 25 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ENTERING TEXT
Overview
By default, Blackboard Academic Suite will format text to 12-point, left-justified Arial. Any other
formatting must be done with HTML tags or using the Text Box Editor.
Text boxes may appear using the Visual Text Box Editor or with the options shown below. For more
information about the Visual Text Box Editor, please see the next topic.
Text box options
The following options are available in most text entry boxes in the Blackboard Academic Suite:
F ORM AT O PTION
B EHAVIOR
Smart Text
Automatically recognizes a link entered in the text box. Smart
text recognizes the ENTER key as a paragraph tag and accepts
HTML tags as well. Smart Text will also prompt to load images
if an image source tag appears.
Web addresses entered as URLs are
converted to links. The URL must begin with "http://" and there
must be a space before the "http://" to distinguish it from the
previous word.
If an image tag, <IMG>, is entered in Smart Text,
the Blackboard Academic Suite will automatically prompt you to
upload the image.
Plain Text
Displays text as it is written in the text area. Plain text does not
render HTML code. HTML code will appear as text.
HTML
Displays text as coded by the user using Hypertext Mark-up
Language (HTML) tags.
Note: The Smart Text and Plain Text options are only available if the
Administrator has turned off the Text Box Editor or if the user does not
have a Windows Operating System and Internet Explorer Version 5.x or
a later.
It is not possible to display a file in a content item and add a Smart Text or Plain Text description.
Add the description as a separate content item and then add display the file in the next content
item.
Smart text, Plain text, or HTML may be used in the Text Box Editor. Options at the bottom of the
box allow the user to switch format at anytime.
Smart text should be used if the intent is to display the text in the exact way that it is typed in. Line
breaks, tabbing, and other keyboard formatting will be retained with Smart text.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 26 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Plain text strips any formatting from the text, except for line breaks. The result is completely
unformatted text. This may be useful if the user needs to do a lot of copy and pasting of the
content, or if the intent is to display code information. For example, if the user wants to show how to
write something in HTML, Plain text should be used to retain the HTML tags in the content. Plain
text does not work with MathML or the equation editor. Changing a text box that includes a
mathematical formula to Plain text will make the formula unreadable.
The HTML option should be used if the user knows HTML and opts to type HTML tags into the Text
Box Editor. The result will be content formatted by the HTML tags used.
File names
Blackboard allows the use of all characters in file names. However, the user's operating system
and browser may limit the types characters accepted. For example, some browsers do not accept
multi byte characters.
Missing image detection in the Text Box Editors
Missing Image Detection functionality is available when a user:
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Box Editor and selects the HTML option
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Box Editor selects the Smart Text option
Missing image detection functionality does not apply when a user:
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Box Editor and selects the Plain text
option
•
links to an HTML file in the Content Collection with a broken image (either via the third row
of the Visual Text Box Editor or as a URL in the Text Box Editor).
Note: Images are stored in HTML using the following syntax: <img
scr="http://image_path">. The source location should be inside double of
single quotations.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 27 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VISUAL TEXT BOX EDITOR
About the Visual Text Box Editor
The Visual Text Box Editor presents controls for entering and formatting text, equations, and
multimedia files. When it is enabled, it appears throughout the system as the default editor when
adding text through a text box.
If the Visual Text Box Editor does not appear, first check the list of browsers below to ensure that
the current browser is compatible. If it is, check that the Visual Text Box Editor is enabled through
Personal Settings. If the Visual Text Box Editor still does not appear, it has most likely been
disabled by the System Administrator.
Users who access the system through assistive technologies should use standard text entry
options instead of the Visual Text Box Editor. Please see the previous topic, Entering Text, for
more information.
Compatible Browsers
The Visual Text Box Editor is compatible with the following browsers on Windows Operating
Systems:
•
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0
•
Mozilla Firefox 1.0
•
Netscape 8.0
The Visual Text Box Editor will not work with older versions of these browsers. Instead, the
standard options for entering text will appear.
The Visual Text Box Editor is compatible with the following browsers on Macintosh Operating
Systems:
•
Safari 2.0
•
Mozilla Firefox 1.0
When run on Safari, the Visual Text Box Editor Lite Version appears. The Lite Version does not
include the button controls for several features because Safari does not yet support those rich-text
editing features. Some features that are not accessible from a button in the Lite Version may still be
activated using keyboard shortcuts. For example, the cut, copy, and paste functions may still be
used through the keyboard shortcuts. Macintosh users may also download and use the free
Mozilla Firefox 1.0 (or higher)Web Browser to use all the features of the Text Box Editor.
Firefox users must perform an extra step to enable the cut, copy, and paste functions. The first time
an attempt is made to cut, copy, or paste text in the Visual Text Box Editor, a message from Firefox
will appear explaining that the action is not allowed. A link is provided for information on how to
enable the cut, copy, and paste functions by editing a Firefox configuration file. The link currently
points to http://www.mozilla.org/editor/midasdemo/securityprefs.html. Please check with Firefox for
the most up-to-date information on using rich-text tools for cut, copy, and paste. Macintosh users
may find that this does not fully resolve the problem, particularly because Fireflox does not permit
pasting text from Microsoft Office files on Mac. To accomplish this task, paste the text into a basic
text editor, such as TextEdit or Notepad and then paste the text into the Visual Text Box Editor.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 28 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Visual Text Box Editor Features
The Visual Text Box Editor has three collapsible rows of buttons. The tables below define the
functions of each button and identifies if the button is available in the Lite Version that runs on the
Safari browser.
F IRST
ROW BASIC ACTIONS
B UTTON
D ESCRIPTION
L ITE V ERSION ?
Font Style
Select a style for the text. The options correspond
to standard HTML Style types.
Font size
Select the size of the text.
Font
Select the font.
Y
Bold
Make selected text bold.
Y
Italics
Make selected text italics.
Y
Underline
Underline the selected text.
Y
Strikethrough
Display text with a horizontal line through the
characters. For example, strikethrough.
Subscript
Display text on the same line but slightly above
the current text. For example, 7th.
Superscript
Display text on the same line but slightly below
the current text. For example, H20.
Align left
Align text to the left.
Y
Align Center
Align text in the center.
Y
Align Right
Align text to the right.
Y
Ordered list
Create a numbered list or add a numbered list
item.
Unordered list
Create a bulleted list or add a bullet list item.
Decrease Indent
Move text left.
Increase Indent
Move text right.
S ECOND R OW A DDITIONAL B ASIC A CTIONS
B UTTON
D ESCRIPTION
L ITE
V ERSION ?
Spell Check
Select the ABC checkmark to open Spell Check.
Y
Cut
Cut the selected items.
Copy
Copy the selected items.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 29 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
S ECOND R OW A DDITIONAL B ASIC A CTIONS
Paste
Paste copied or cut content.
Clear Formatting
Removes formatting tags that are shown in the
Pathfinder at the bottom of the text box. Highlight
the formatting tag to delete in the Pathfinder and
then click Clear Formatting to remove. This is
useful when copying and pasting text from another
application yields discrepancies in formatting.
Undo
Select the circular arrow pointing to the left to undo
the previous action.
Y
Redo
Select the circular arrow pointing to the right to redo
the previous action.
Y
Hyperlink
Add a hyperlink. Types include: file, ftp, gopher,
http, https, mailto, news, telnet, and wais. Please
keep in mind that when creating a hyperlink, the
text that appears on the page is separate from the
information about the link. Information on where the
link points is stored in a tag that surrounds the text.
Therefore, it is possible to change the link without
changing the text that is displayed to users. Please
be careful when constructing links to ensure that
the text is consistent with where users will be taken
when they click the link.
Create Table
Add a table.
Horizontal Line
Add a line.
Background Color
Add a highlight color to the selected text.
Y
Text Color
Specify the color of the text.
Y
WebEQ Editor
Open the WebEQ Equation Editor icon (√x) to add
an equation. Equations cannot be added to a cell in
a table. Instead, create the equation outside the
table and then cut and paste the equation into the
cell.
MathML Editor
Open the MathML Equation Editor icon to add an
equation.
Preview
Preview the content as it will be seen by end users.
HTML View
Toggle to view the HTML code that is generated by
the Visual Text Box Editor. Users may also edit the
HTML in this view. Click HTML view again to toggle
back to the standard view.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Y
Page 30 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
The following table includes a description of some options specific to each type of file attachment.
This row will only appear where it is possible to attach a file or link to a file in the Blackboard
Content System.
T HIRD
ROW FILE ATTACHMENT ACTIONS AND SPECIAL OPTIONS
B UTTON
D ESCRIPTION
Attach file
Add a file to the text area. The Insert Link to File
page will appear.
L ITE V ERSION ?
•
Browse: select a file from the local machine
•
Link to Content Collection: select an item
or folder from the Content Collection, if
Content System integration is allowed.
•
Specify Source URL: provide a URL where
the item is located.
•
Name of link to file: provide a descriptive
name of the content is helpful for the user.
This allows the user to read the link in
context, rather than simply read the name of
the file being linked to.
•
Launch in New Window: Select whether to
open the file in the current window or open a
new browser window to display the file.
Attach image
Add an image to the text area. The Insert Image
page appears.
Attach
MPEG/AVI
Add MPEG/AVI media content to the text area. The
Insert MPEG file page appears.
Add Quick Time
Add Apple QuickTime media to the text area. The
Insert QuickTime File page appears.
Add audio
Add an audio file, such as .mp3, .midi or .wav to the
text area. The Insert Audio File page appears.
Add
Flash/Shockwave
Add Macromedia Flash or Shockwave media to the
text area. The Insert SWF File page appears.
Attaching files in the Visual Text Box Editor
Users have the option of attaching different types of files to the Visual Text Box Editor. Do not copy
and paste a file from one text box to another; this will cause errors. More information about the
available options when adding a multimedia file can be found in the topic, Insert Multimedia File.
The table below explains which button in the Third Row of the Visual Text Box Editor is used to add
different file types.
F ILE
ATTACHMENT TYPES
Attach file
.doc, .exe, .html, .htm, .pdf, .ppt, .pps, .txt, .wpd, .xls, .zip
Attach image
.gif, .jif, .jpg, .jpeg, .tiff, .wmf
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 31 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F ILE
Instructor Manual
ATTACHMENT TYPES
Attach MPEG/AVI
.avi, .mpg, .mpeg
Add Quick Time
.qt
Add audio
.aiff, .asf, .moov, .mov, .mp, .wav, .wma, .wmv
Add Flash/Shockwave
.swa, .swf
Keyboard shortcuts for the Visual Text Box Editor
The Visual Text Box Editor supports the keyboard shortcuts listed in the table below. Please note
that Macintosh users should use the CMD key instead of the CTRL key.
Note: If the shortcut keys that move selected items one character left,
right, up, or down are used, the object being moved will be absolutely
positioned. An absolutely positioned element is determined by pixels, so
moving it up once will move it up one pixel.
K EYBOARD S HORTCUTS
Movement
RIGHT ARROW
Move one character to the right.
LEFT ARROW
Move one character to the left.
DOWN ARROW
Move down one line.
UP ARROW
Move up one line.
CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
Move right one word.
MAC: CMD+RGT ARROW
CTRL+LEFT ARROW
Move left one word.
MAC: CMD+LFT ARROW
END
Move to the end of the line.
HOME
Move to the start of the line.
CTRL+DOWN ARROW
Move down one paragraph.
MAC: CMD+DWN ARROW
CTRL+UP ARROW
Move up one paragraph.
MAC: CMD+UP ARROW
PAGE DOWN
Move down one page.
PAGE UP
Move up one page.
CTRL+HOME
Move to the beginning of the text.
MAC: CMD+HOME
CTRL+END
Move to the end of the text.
MAC: CMD+END
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 32 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
K EYBOARD S HORTCUTS
Selection
SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW
Extend the selection one character to the right.
SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
Extend the selection one character to the left.
CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT
ARROW
Extend the selection right one word.
MAC: CMD+SHIFT+RIGHT
ARROW
CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
Extend the selection left one word.
MAC: CMD+SHIFT+LEFT
ARROW
SHIFT+UP ARROW
Extend the selection up one line.
SHIFT+DOWN ARROW
Extend the selection down one line.
SHIFT+END
Extend the selection to the end of the current line.
SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the start of the current line.
SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Extend the selection down one page.
SHIFT+PAGE UP
Extend the selection up one page.
CTRL+SHIFT+END
Extend the selection to the end of the document.
CTRL+SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the beginning of the document.
MAC: CMD+SHIFT+HOME
CTRL+A
Select all elements in the document.
MAC: CMD+A
Editing
BACKSPACE
Delete the selection. Or, if there is no selection, delete the
character to the left of the cursor.
CTRL+BACKSPACE
Delete all of a word to the left of the cursor.
MAC: CMD+BACKSPACE
CTRL+C
Copy the selection.
MAC: CMD+C
CTRL+V
Paste cut contents or copied contents.
MAC: CMD+V
CTRL+X
Cut the selection.
MAC: CMD+X
DELETE
Delete the selection.
INSERT
Toggle between inserting and overwriting text.
CTRL+Z
Undo the most recent formatting command.
MAC: CMD+Z
CTRL+Y
Re-do the most recent undone command.
MAC: CMD+Y
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 33 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
K EYBOARD S HORTCUTS
CTRL+F
Find text.
MAC: CMD+F
SHIFT+F10
Display the context menu. This is the same as a right-click.
Formatting
CTRL+B
Toggle bold formatting.
MAC: CMD+B
CTRL+I
Toggle italic formatting.
MAC: CMD+I
CTRL+U
Toggle underlining.
MAC: CMD+U
Missing image detection in the Text Box Editors
Missing Image Detection functionality is available when a user:
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the HTML view of the Visual Text Box Editor
Missing image detection functionality does not apply when a user:
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the Visual Text Box Editor
•
uploads an HTML file with a broken image from the third row of the Visual Text Box Editor
•
links to an HTML file in the Content Collection with a broken image (either via the third row
of the Visual Text Box Editor or as a URL in the Text Box Editor).
Note: Images are stored in HTML using the following syntax: <img
scr="http://image_path">. The source location should be inside double of
single quotations.
Differences between Text Box Editor and Visual Text Box Editor
The Text Box Editor and Visual Text Box Editor both allow the entry of formatted text in the
Blackboard Academic Suite.
The Text Box Editor allows Plain Text, Smart Text and HTML formatting. The Visual Text Box
Editor allows users to modify content in an interface resembling a word processor, and perform
basic HTML functions without knowledge of any HTML. These features include creating tables,
bulleted lists, hyperlinks, horizontal lines, and more. Users may also format text and paragraphs,
and upload multimedia files in the Visual Text Box Editor. Both editors may include WebEQ,
MathML and SpellCheck features.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 34 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SELECTING DATES
Overview
Availability of the course and individual content items, including Assessments and Learning Units,
can be controlled by date. Content may only be available within a certain range, available from a
certain date until the end of the course, or available from the date created until a specified end
date.
Setting availability by date
Dates are set using drop-down lists to select the day, month, year, and in some cases, time. There
is also a calendar interface that can be used to select the date.
•
To set availability to a set range, select both a start date and an end date.
•
To set availability from the current time until a certain date, only set an end date.
•
To set availability from a date until the end of the course, only set a start date.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 35 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
HTML TIPS
Overview
This section provides some basic HTML codes and tips for adding simple formatting to a Course.
Additional resources for learning more about HTML may be found at the end of this section.
What is HTML?
HTML is the set of codes used to format (or “mark up”) Web pages. A single piece of HTML code is
called a "tag." HTML tags are surrounded by pointed brackets ("<" and ">"). Tags usually come in
pairs.
For example the pair of HTML tags to create bold text looks like this:
<b>This text will be bold. </b>
The <b> tag means "start bold here." The end tag, </b>, means "end bold here." End tags always
include the forward slash ("/").
Paragraph formatting
In HTML, a paragraph break is used to put a single blank line between paragraphs. A hard return
inserts no blank line.
The tag can be used alone at the end of a paragraph, or as a pair. If used as a pair, the
"align=left|center|right" modifier may be included in the beginning tag to control placement.
For example, the following tag would create a right-aligned paragraph:
<P align=right>Fourscore and seven years ago, our founding father set forth upon this continent a new
nation.</P>
Text formatting
The following tags are used for basic text formatting:
Bold text tag: <B> text </B>
Italic text tag: <I> text </I>
Underlined text tag: <U> text </U>
Font format tags: <FONT> text </FONT>
(Font formats include FACE=fontstyle COLOR=fontcolor SIZE=fontsize)
The FONT tag requires at least one of the modifiers (FACE, COLOR, or SIZE).
The FACE modifier can be set to any font, but the person viewing the page must also have that font
installed on their computer. For that reason, it is best to stick to common fonts like Times New
Roman, Arial, or Courier New.
The COLOR modifier will recognize basic colors, including black, white, gray, red, blue, yellow,
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 36 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
green, purple, orange, cyan, magenta, and so forth.
The SIZE modifier does not refer to typical font point sizes. In HTML fonts can be sizes 1 through 7.
The default font size is 3.
Note: Since each user may set the default font point at which their
browser will display text, these font sizes can be relative. For example,
one user might have their browser's default font set to 10-point Times
while another has their browser's default font set to 12-point Times. The
HTML tag would create 10-point Times text on the first computer, and
12-point on the latter, since 3 is the default size.
Users may use plus or minus signs to indicate sizes relative to the default. For example, the
following HTML would create text that is two steps larger than the default font size:
<FONT size=+2>Bigger, Better, Faster!</FONT>
Creating Links with HTML
Links are created using the ‘anchor’ tag.
<A href="URL">Clickable text</A>
In the following example, the words ‘Blackboard Inc.’ will turn into a link that directs the user to the
Blackboard home page.
<A href="http://www.blackboard.com/">Blackboard Inc.</A>
Creating HTML with other tools
Course developers do not have to learn everything about HTML. They may also use Web authoring
tools to generate HTML. There are many applications that may be used for this. Some examples
are:
•
Word processors- Microsoft© Word™, Corel© WordPerfect™, Apple© AppleWorks™,
Sun© StarOffice™, and almost every other contemporary word processor contains the
ability to convert word processing documents to a Web page coded in HTML. However,
the conversion from a word processing document to an HTML Web page is often not
perfect, especially for documents with complex formatting.
•
WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Web-authoring tools- These tools
provide an environment similar to a word processor for developing Web pages and entire
©
Web sites. There are many products to choose from, including, Macromedia
©
©
©
Dreamweaver™, Adobe GoLive™, NetObjects Fusion, and Microsoft FrontPage™.
•
HTML Editors- Applications like BareBones© Software's BBEdit™ and Macromedia©
Allaire HomeSite™ provide an editing environment for HTML documents. While they are
not WYSIWYG, HTML editors usually have a "preview" mode that allows users to switch
between viewing the raw HTML codes and previewing how those codes will look in the
browser. These products help write HTML faster and easier, but they presume the user is
already knowledgeable about HTML.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 37 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Incorporating HTML generated with other applications
Instructors may decide to incorporate HTML generated content with other applications into their
Course. There are two options for including this content:
Save the content as an HTML file and upload the HTML file itself into Blackboard Learning System.
In the Course area, next to the Special Action field, select Create a link to this file. The
Blackboard Learning System will automatically detect images in an HTML file and prompt the user
to upload the images as well.
Copy and paste the HTML code into a text box.
To copy and paste HTML code, follow the steps below:
1.
View the HTML code. Most of the tools discussed above will have a mechanism (usually
part of a View menu) to allow the user to see the ‘HTML source’.
2.
Copy all of the HTML tags between but not including the <BODY> and </BODY> tags.
The Blackboard Learning System dynamically generates the HTML above and below the
BODY tags, so this portion of the HTML source must not be copied.
3.
Paste the copied HTML into the text box.
4.
Choose the HTML text-formatting option.
5.
Submit the form.
6.
If there are <IMG> tags in the HTML, the Blackboard Learning System will automatically
detect them when the page is submitted. Users will receive a second page prompting
them to upload the appropriate images.
Troubleshooting
Blackboard recommends that users do not use the following in a Course:
•
Do not use multiple frames.
•
Do not add Web pages that contain additional navigational items, for example, buttons.
Only include links that directly point to a URL.
•
Do not add <body> tags, <html> tags, <head> tags, <form> tags, or <form element> tags.
Entering these tags will cause issues when the page is viewed.
•
Do not use inline style sheets. Inline style sheets are not supported by all browsers.
•
Do not use <applet> tags inside the text box. These tags may cause errors in the content.
Other HTML resources
There are many online resources for additional information about HTML. One that users may want
to visit is The World Wide Web Consortium located at www.w3.org.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 38 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
LINK TO FILE
Overview
Users may include a link to a file from the Text Box editor.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Link to File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert Link to File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system. For
example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
Link to File Options
Name of Link to File
Enter the name of the link that users click to access the attached
file.
Launch in new
window
Select Yes to have the file open in a new separate window. Select
No to have the file open in the content frame.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 39 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
INSERT MULTIMEDIA FILE
Overview
Users may add the following multimedia files when authoring content in the Text Box Editor.
•
Image.
•
MPEG or AVI. MPEG (Moving Picture Expert Groups) files are audio-visual files in a
digital compressed format. AVI (Audio Video Interleave) is Microsoft’s file format for
storing audio and video data.
•
Quicktime. QuickTime is a video and animation system that supports most formats,
including JPG and MPEG. Users with a PC will require a QuickTime driver to view
QuickTime files. Macintosh users do not require this driver.
•
Audio.
•
Flash or Shockwave. Macromedia Flash and Shockwave files support audio, animation
and video; they are also browser independent. Browsers require specific plug-ins to run
Flash and Shockwave files.
The options to control how a multimedia file displays, such as should it loop, should the controls
display, will not be available after the file has been inserted. To edit these options, use the HTML
view and edit the options directly.
Image Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Image page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert Image
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
Image Options
Set the Width
Enter the width of the image in pixels.
Set the Height
Enter the height of the image in pixels.
Border
Choose a border for the image. If ‘0’ is chosen there will be no
border around the image.
Alt Text
Enter text that will be used display if the image fails to load.
Alternate text is important for visually impaired users who access
the Web.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 40 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MPEG or AVI Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert MPEG File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert MPEG File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
MPEG File Options
Set the Width
Enter the width of the video in pixels.
Set the Height
Enter the height of the video in pixels.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to
let users start playing manually after opening the page.
Controls
Select the size of controls to appear to users. Controls must be
available if users are to start the video manually.
Quicktime Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert QuickTime File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert QuickTime File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
QuickTime File Options
Set the Width
Enter the width of the video.
Set the Height
Enter the height of the video.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to
let users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Controls
Select to display controls.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 41 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Audio Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Audio File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert Audio File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
Audio File Options
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to
let users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Controls
Select to display controls.
Flash or Shockwave Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert SWF File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert SWF File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
SWF File Options
Set the Width
Enter the width of the video.
Set the Height
Enter the height of the video.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to
let users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Set Quality
Select the quality of the images that will appear to users. Please
note that the better the quality of an image the larger the file.
Larger files take longer to open.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 42 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ABOUT SPELL CHECK
Overview
The Spell Check feature supports a full English dictionary, a supplemental word list configured by
the System Administrator, and custom word lists that are stored as a cookie on a user’s local
machine. The spell check feature is available wherever users can enter blocks of text. It is also
available as a module with the Blackboard Community System.
Word lists
Misspelled words are determined by the following three sources:
•
Spell Check Dictionary: A full English dictionary that includes words that will not be
flagged for correction. The dictionary is also the only source for suggestions. This
dictionary cannot be modified.
•
Supplemental Word List: A list of additional terms added by the System Administrator
that do not appear in the default dictionary.
•
Personal Word List: This word list is stored as a cookie on each user’s local machine.
Words are added to this list using the Learn function. The words in the personal word list
are not flagged for correction. These words are not included as suggestions for misspelled
words.
Extensive personal word lists may slow performance of the Spell Check tool.
Personal word list and cookies
The personal word list is stored as a cookie on the user’s local machine. The cookie is not user or
installation specific. Therefore, a user’s word list will be available to them whenever they are using
Spell Check as long as they are on the same local machine. Also, if another user logs onto the
same machine, that user will have the personal word list stored on that machine applied to Spell
Check. For example, if a user creates a personal word list on a computer in the computer lab, this
word list will be available to all users who use this computer in the lab. The user may not take this
word list with them to a different computer.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 43 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
USING SPELL CHECK
Overview
When Spell Check is launched it will review the text block and sequentially bring up any words it
does not recognize for review.
Functions
The table below details the functions available with Spell Check.
TO . . .
THEN
replace the
occurrence of a
word with a
correction or
suggestion
enter a correction in the Replace With field or select a
suggestion from the list. Click Replace to change the word in
the text to the word in the Replace With field. If the misspelled
word appears later in the text block it will be flagged again for
correction.
replace every
occurrence of a
word in the text
with a correction or
suggestion
enter a correction in the Replace With field or select a
suggestion from the list. Click Replace All to change every
occurrence of the word in the text with the word in the Replace
With field.
ignore the word
and not make a
correction
click Ignore. The word will not be changed. If the word appears
again in the text block it will be flagged for correction.
ignore every
occurrence of the
word in the text
block
click Ignore All. The word will not be changed and Spell Check
will not flag it for correction again in the text.
teach Spell Check
to recognize the
word as correct
click Learn. The word will be added to the personal word list.
Whenever Spell Check is run on the local machine the word will
be recognized and not flagged.
close the spell
check without
finishing
click Finish.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 44 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Recognized errors
Note how Spell Check handles the following circumstances:
•
Double words are recognized as errors.
•
Irregular capitalization is not recognized as an error.
•
Initial capitalization at the beginning of sentences is not checked.
•
Words in ALL CAPS are checked for spelling errors.
•
Words that contain numbers are recognized as errors.
•
A word that appears in the supplemental or personal word list must be entered as a
correction during a spell check (these words do not appear as suggestions). The Spell
Check tool must be run again to verify that the word is spelled correctly.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 45 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MATH AND SCIENCE NOTATION TOOL – WEBEQ EQUATION EDITOR
Overview
The Math and Science Notation Tool (WebEQ Equation Editor) is a general purpose equation
editor. The Math and Science Notation Tool enables users to use mathematical and scientific
notation. Users can add equations, edit existing equations, and move equations within the Equation
Editor. All of the Equation Editor symbols are based on MathML, a markup language for math on
the Web. MathML is a subset of XML.
Users may receive a pop-up box when launching WebEQ that asks the user to trust an applet
provided by Design Science, the maker of WebEQ. If users click Always, the pop-up will no longer
appear on that computer when launching WebEQ.
For best performance on a Windows® operating system use Internet Explorer 6.0.
For best performance on a Macintosh®:
Mac OS X v10.2 or later
Install the MRJPlug-in. http://homepage.mac.com/pcbeard/MRJPlugin/
MathML Equation Editor
The MathML Equation Editor functions in the same way at the Math and Science Notation Tool.
Instead of opening with the symbol buttons, a blank text box will appear where users can enter
XML.
Functions
The table below details how to access the Equation Editors.
TO . . .
CLICK
access the
WebEQ Equation
Editor
the Math and Science Notation Tool icon.
insert XML
the MathML Equation Editor icon.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 46 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADDING AND EDITING EQUATIONS
Overview
Once an equation has been created it can be copied and used again or copied and modified using
the Notation Tool features.
Functions
The table below describes the functions available in the Math and Science Notation Tool.
TO . . .
THEN
...
create a name for
the equation
enter a name in the Equation Name: field. To accept the
default name do not make any changes.
create an equation
use the equation symbols available on the keyboard or in the
toolbar to create equations.
modify an existing
equation
select the equation from the Edit Equation: drop-down list.
The equation will appear in the Editor. Click Modify to save the
changes.
submit the
equation and its
name
click Add.
Tip
If an equation is more then one line or uses a large font size, the equation may be cut off when it
appears in a course. Add an empty line after the final line in the equation to prevent this error.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 47 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CREATION WIZARD
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard enables users to create courses through an easy workflow. The
Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of course creation into a
sequence of manageable pieces. Instructors can use the wizard to complete the initial setup of a
course in one easy-to–follow process.
Note: Only courses may be created through the Course Creation
Wizard. Organizations may not be created through this method.
Find this page
To open the Course Creation Wizard, select the link in the Course Creation Wizard Module on the
My Institution tab. The wizard will appear in a pop-up window.
Wizard navigation
Users may use the links at the bottom of each Wizard page to navigate within the Wizard. These
links include options for Cancel, Back, Next, and Finish. All links may not be available on all pages
within the Wizard.
Wizard Progress Tracker
The Wizard Progress Tracker appears on the left side of each page in the Wizard and represents
the entire workflow of the Course Creation Wizard. Users can view where they are in the workflow
as they build a course. There are no navigation options in the Wizard Progress Tracker.
Wizard steps
The Welcome page gives an overview of the different steps for creating a course through the
Course Creation Wizard. Users may choose to skip some of these steps.
Note: If the user skips steps in the Wizard, these options will
automatically be set to the system defaults. These settings may be
modified through the Control Panel once the course is created.
The following list includes all of the steps for creating a course:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Course Information
Enter course information, such as Course Name, Course ID,
and a description of the course.
Course Materials
Select a template, course cartridge, or an existing course to
use as the basis of the course, or create a new course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 48 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Course Design
Design the buttons and text for the course
Course Menu
Add or remove options that appear on the Course Menu.
Availability and
Duration
Select which users this course will be available to.
Enrollment Options
Select how users will be enrolled the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 49 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE INFORMATION
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. The user enters course details, such as the
Title and Course ID on the Course Information page.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Course Information page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Course Information
Course Name
Enter a name for the course.
Course ID
Enter a unique Course ID. The Course ID should not have any
spaces or characters other than numbers and letters, dash (-),
underscore (_), and period (.). Do not use special characters.
Special characters include: %&#<>=+ as well as spaces. When
creating attributes a good rule to follow is only use alphanumeric
characters, underscores, dots, and dashes.
Description
Enter a description of the course. The description will appear in
the listing with the course name and ID. A summary and
enrollment instructions should be included in the description.
Note: If the user returns to this page after the course has been created,
he or she will see a read-only view of this page. The data in these fields
may not be changed after the wizard is complete.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 50 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE MATERIALS
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. The Course Content page allows the user
to choose a template, an existing course, or a Course Cartridge as the basis for the new course.
Users may also choose to create an entirely new course.
Fields
The table below details options on the Course Content page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Create an entirely
new course.
Select this option to create a course that is not based on an
existing course, template or Course Cartridge.
Create a course
using a Template
Select this option to create a course using a course Template in
the system.
Template dropdown list
A list of course templates available in the system. Select a
template to use for this course. When a template is used, all of
the course content in the template course is copied to the new
course. The Instructor may change course settings and course
content in the destination course once they have completed the
Wizard.
Create a course
from an existing
course
Select this option to create the course by copying an existing
course.
Course dropdown list
A list of courses in which the user is an Instructor, TA or Course
Builder. Select the course to copy to create this new course.
Only the course content (not user data) will be copied from the
existing course into the new course. The Instructor may modify
the course content in the destination course.
Create the course
using a Course
Cartridge
Select this option to create a course using a Course Cartridge.
Course Cartridge
Instructor
Download key
Enter the download key for the Course Cartridge.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 51 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE DESIGN
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. Instructors select the appearance of a
Course on the Course Design page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Design page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select a Navigation Style
Navigation Style
Select Buttons to make the areas of the Course Menu appear
in a button format.
Select Text Navigation to make areas of the Course Menu
appear in a text format.
Select a Button Style
When the Button Navigation Style is chosen an additional set of functions must be defined. The
table below details the fields on the Select Style Properties section for buttons.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Style Properties
Button Type
Choose the Button Type from the drop-down list.
Button Shape
Click an option to choose the Button Shape.
Button Style
Use the drop-down list to select the color of the buttons.
Click Gallery of Buttons to view all of the button options.
Select Text Navigation Colors
When the Text Navigation Style is chosen an additional set of functions must be defined. The table
below details the fields on the Select Style Properties section for text.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Style Properties
Select
background color
for navigation
Click Pick and select a background color for the Course Menu.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 52 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select a highlight
color for the
navigation
Click Pick and select a color for the text in the Course Menu.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 53 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE MENU
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. The Course Menu page allows the user to
choose which options will appear in the Course Menu.
Functions
If the user selected to create a new course they may add and remove items on the Course Menu. If
the user selected an option to use a template, an existing course or a Course Cartridge on the
Course Content page, he or she will be unable to modify the Course Menu. The Course Menu is
automatically copied from the existing course, template or cartridge. Users can modify the Course
Menu after the course is created from the Control Panel.
Adding a menu item creates a Course area with a name specified by the user. New Course areas
are automatically available to Students, and unavailable to Guests and Observers.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 54 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CREATION WIZARD – AVAILABILITY AND DURATION
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. The Availability and Duration page is used
to control access to the course and the course duration.
Fields
The table below details options on the Availability and Duration page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Guest Access
Guest Access
Select either Yes or No to make the course available to Guests.
Course Availability
Availability
Select either Yes or No to make the course available to users. If
the course is set to available, all users participating in the course
will have access. If the course is set to unavailable, access is
determined by course role. Courses that are unavailable will not
appear in the Course Catalog.
Course Duration
Continuous
Select this option to make the course continuously available. If this
option is selected the course will always be available.
Select Dates
Select this option to set the course availability for a specific number
of days. Use the drop down list to select the starting and ending
dates of the course or click the calendar icon to select dates from
the calendar interface. The course may also begin on a specific
date and not have a specific end date.
After the end date, the course is no longer available for Students
but is otherwise unchanged. Students who attempt to login to the
Course are told that the course has ended.
Days (from the
date of
enrollment)
Select this option to place a time limit on a self-paced course. The
course will be available for that number of days from the time a
Student enrolls. For example, if the number of days is set to 10, the
course will be available for 10 days to each Student who enrolls.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 55 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Role availability
The following table describes what type of access different user roles have to a course that is
unavailable:
C OURSE R OLE
A CCESS
Students
Courses set to Unavailable will not appear at all in the
Student’s My Courses module on the My Institution tab, or in
the Student’s Course List on the Courses tab. Students may not
access a Course that is set to Unavailable.
Instructors
Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the Courses you are
teaching: section of the My Courses module and in the Course
List on the Courses tab. The course will be indicated as
Unavailable, but will still be accessible by the Instructor.
Course Builders
and Teaching
Assistants
Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the Courses in
which you are participating: section of the My Courses
module and in the Course List on the Courses tab. The course
will be indicated as Unavailable. The course is still accessible
by Course Builders and Teaching Assistants.
Graders
Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the Courses in
which you are participating: section of the My Courses
module and in the Course List on the Courses tab. The course
will be indicated as Unavailable to others but is accessible by
Graders.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WHEN COURSE IS UNAV AILABLE
Page 56 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE ENROLLMENT
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. Instructors set the enrollment process for a
course from the Course Enrollment page. Enrollment can also be limited to a set time and to those
Students that receive approval and are granted an access code.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Enrollment page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Enrollment Options
Instructor/Admin
Select this option to make course enrollment Instructor
and Administrator led. Select the check box to create a
link for Students to email an enrollment request to the
Instructor. The link appears in the course catalog.
Self Enrollment
Select this option to allow Students to enroll in a course
as determined by the limits defined in the starting date,
ending date, and access code.
Select Enrollment Options
Start Date
Select this option to set an enrollment start date. Choose
an enrollment start date by clicking the drop-down arrow
and selecting date values or click the calendar icon to
select a date from the calendar interface. If Self
Enrollment is selected this date is required.
End Date
Select this option to set an enrollment end date. Choose
an enrollment end date by clicking the drop-down arrows
and selecting date values or click the icon to select a date
from the calendar interface. If Self Enrollment is selected
this date is required.
Require Access Code
to Enroll
Select this option to require an access code to enroll.
Enter an access code that will be distributed to approved
Students. If selected, this access code will be required for
Students to enroll in the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 57 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CONTENT
Introduction
Instructors use the tools available through the Course areas section of the Control Panel to
manage information, materials, Assignments, and Assessments used in the course.
Note: Instructors can set the name of Course areas and add additional
Course areas from Manage Course Menu.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following functions:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Content Areas
Reviews Content Areas. Content Areas are the top-level
containers that organize and store content.
Course Content
Describes how content is used in courses.
Items
Introduces individual content Items.
File Attachments
Describes how to upload files.
Add SCORM, IMS
and NLN Content
Explains how to add SCORM, NLN, and IMS content to a
Content Area.
Folders
Reviews the organization of Content Areas into folders.
Content Metadata
Presents the attributes that can be used to describe content.
External Links
Describes how to link to an outside Web site.
Course Link
Describes how to link to content in another course.
Learning Units
Presents information on Learning Units. Learning Units
organize content sequentially.
Tests
Describes how to deploy a test in a Content Area.
Test Options
Reviews the options available when deploying a test.
Assignments
Describes Assignments.
Tool Linking
Describes how to create a link to a tool within a Content Area.
Copy and Move
Content
Reviews how to copy and move Items.
The Open
Standards Content
Player
Provides detailed information on using the Open Standards
Content Player to present SCORM, NLN, and IMS content.
Syllabus
Describes how to build a syllabus for the course.
Adaptive Release
Introduces the concept of adaptive release of content.
Adaptive Release
Describes the functions used to manage adaptive release.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 58 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
S ECTION
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
Functions
Adaptive Release
Criteria
Explains the rules that govern adaptive release.
Review Status
Describes how Instructors can check that Students have
viewed content.
User Progress
Explains how adaptive release can be used to track Student
progress through the content a Student views.
Performance
Dashboard
Describes the Performance Dashboard view into Student
progress.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 59 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CONTENT AREAS
About Content Areas
Course Content Areas are used to organize all course content materials. A link to each Content
Area creates the first level of the Course Menu tree directory. Course developers organize and
manage Content Areas from the Control Panel.
While the Instructor has almost complete control over the Content Areas through the Control Panel,
the Administrator is able to set defaults and overrides that define the names and default availability
of course areas in each course.
Adding a Content Area
By default, a specific number of Content Areas appear in a course. Instructors may decide to add
additional Content Areas or modify existing Content Areas. For example, a Content Area for
Assessments may be added and the name of the Assignments area may be changed to
Homework.
Follow the steps below to add a Content Area:
1.
Select Manage Course Menu under Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Content Area.
3.
Complete the Add New Area page. The availability of this area is also set on this page.
The new Content Area may be made available to Guests, Observers, and/ or Students in
the course.
4.
Existing Content Areas may be changed by selecting Modify next to a Content Area on
the Manage Course Menu page and updating the information.
Manage Content Areas
Once Content Areas for the course have been created, content creation may begin. All content is
added and modified within the Content Areas. Select a Content Area on the Control Panel to open
the main Content Area page. All actions related to managing content are available from this page.
This includes:
•
Add, remove and edit items
•
Organize the order of items
•
Add and manage Adaptive Release rules
•
Create and modify content metadata
•
Manage Statistics Tracking
•
Enable / Disable Review Status
•
View User progress
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 60 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CONTENT
About Content Types
Instructors may add a number of different kinds of content to course Content Areas; these are
referred to as Content Types. Content Types generally fall into two different categories:
•
Content – Content that adds information to a course, for example, a file or a Learning Unit.
•
Reference – Content that references something that lies outside the Content Area, such
as an External Link or a Course Link.
All content shares a few similarities; each piece of content includes a name and description. Many
Content Types also allow the Instructor to set options such as availability and date restrictions.
Content Type descriptions
Content Types may be selected from the Action Bar and drop-down list of a Content Area page.
C ONTENT T YPE
D ESCRIPTION
Item
A general piece of content to which
items may be attached.
Test
On-line evaluations of Student
knowledge and skills. Test properties,
such as availability and presentation
options, are managed through the
course area where the Test appears.
For information on building Tests and
other Assessments see the section on
How to Create an Assessment.
Assignment
Content that Instructors may mark
based on a given number of points
possible, such as class work.
Learning Unit
A set of content that includes a
structured path for progressing through
the items.
Folder
A folder within a Content Area to which
other content types may be added.
Folders allow Instructors to organize a
Content Area into a structured area with
a hierarchy or categories.
External Link
Link to an outside Web site.
Course Link
Link to another item in a course.
Survey
Similar to Tests, Surveys are useful to
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 61 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
C ONTENT T YPE
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
polling purposes and evaluations.
Questions in Surveys cannot be
assigned points and Surveys may not
be graded.
Tool
Link to a tool in the course, such as a
Discussion Board or Virtual Classroom
session.
Offline Content
A direct path to a specified file on a
drive, usually a CD-ROM. To access
this file, users must have the correct
CD-ROM in their computer.
Syllabus Builder
Content item that enables an Instructor
to build a course syllabus by walking
through a series of steps.
SCORM Content
Content that adheres to Sharable
Content Object Reference Model
(SCORM) standards.
IMS Content
Content that matches IMS
specifications. Additional information
may be found at
http://www.imsproject.org.
NLN Content
A package of content developed by the
National Learning Network. (NLN)
Additional information may be found at
http://www.nln.ac.uk.
Content Availability
When a content item is added to a course it is not automatically available. An availability option on
the Add and Modify pages allows the user to set the content to available or unavailable. This allows
the Instructor to create content and save it in a draft format before it is made available within a
course. This availability setting is separate from Adaptive Release. If an item is not available users
may not access it regardless of the Adaptive Release rules.
Content Options
When an item is added to a Content Area a number of options are available on the Add page. The
options available depend on the Content Type; not all options are always available. These options
are used to set availability, date restrictions, and tracking. The following is a description of all of the
options that may be available:
C ONTENT T YPE
D ESCRIPTION
Make the content available
Select Yes to make the content
available to users. If No is selected
this content is unavailable, regardless
of Adaptive Release rules.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 62 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
C ONTENT T YPE
D ESCRIPTION
Open in new window
Select Yes to open the item in a
separate browser window. This is
helpful as users may continue viewing
the Content Area along with the item.
Choose date restrictions
Select the range of dates that this item
will appear. Select the Display After
checkbox for the item to appear after a
specific date. If this option is checked,
select the corresponding date and time
below. Select the Display Until
checkbox for the item to appear until a
specific date. If this option is checked,
select the corresponding date and time
below.
Track number of views
Select Yes to track the Course Statistics
and generate reports on usage and
activity for the item.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 63 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ITEMS
About Items
Items are general pieces of content added to a course to which items may be attached.
Add an Item
Follow the steps below to add an item to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Item from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete the Add Item page and click Submit.
Attach a file to an item
Files from a local system may be attached to an item in a Content Area. See File Attachments for
additional information about file types and file names. Follow the steps below to attach a file to an
item:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Item from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete Section 1 – Content Information of the Add Item page.
4.
Select Browse next to Attach Local file or Link to Content Collection. Select the file.
5.
Complete the Name of Link to File field. This name appears to users; they will select this
link to open the attached file.
6.
Select an option in the drop-down list in the Special Action field. See Special Actions for
more information about these options.
7.
Complete Section 3 – Options and click Submit.
Files may also be attached to an item from the Content Collection. In
Step 4, select Browse next to Link to Content Collection. Select the
file on the Content Collection window that appears.
Note: The Blackboard Learning System can recognize additional
file types and associated applications if a MIME extension is
added. Contact your System Administrator for more information
about adding MIME extensions.
Note: Users who have the third row of the Visual Text Box Editor
available may use the options in the third row to add items.
Special Actions
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 64 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Section two of the Add Item page contains a Special Action field which allows users to select the
behavior of files attached to an item. The following Special Actions are available:
•
Create a link to this file: Attach the file to the item. A link is automatically inserted below
the document title to access the file.
•
Display media file within the page: Display media file within the page: Embed certain
kinds of media within the page itself instead of creating a link. When this option is
selected, the file will not appear in the Currently Attached Files field after the page is
submitted. The image or image tag for the file will appear in the Text Box Editor. (The
image may appear in a black or transparent box.) Embed certain kinds of media within the
page itself instead of creating a link. When this option is selected, the file will not appear in
the Currently Attached Files field after the page is submitted. The image or image tag for
the file will appear in the Text Box Editor. (The image may appear in a black or
transparent box.) If this option is selected, the attached file must be a format recognizable
by the Blackboard Learning System. If it is not, a link to the file is automatically created.
•
Unpackage this file: Indicates to the system that the file must be unpackaged before
displaying.
Note: If the file format is not one of the supported digital media
formats, the Display media file within the page feature will default
to the Create a link to this file feature.
Imbed image files
Image files may be embedded in Items. The following steps explain how to embed an image file
(for example, a .jpg file) in a Content Area.
1.
In the Control Panel, open a Content Area such as Course Documents.
2.
Select Add Item on the Content Area page. The Add Item page appears.
3.
Enter a title for the content item and add a description or introduction to the image in the
text box.
4.
Click Browse next to Attach local file and locate the image to add.
5.
The Name of Link to File field may be left blank. The image is being displayed on the
page.
6.
Select Display media file within the page in the Special Action drop-down list.
7.
Select the appropriate options for the item.
8.
Click Submit and then OK. The Content Actions page appears.
9.
Select the position of the image in the Alignment and Placement fields.
10. In the Set Width and Set Height field enter the width and height of the image in pixels.
11. To create a link to a file outside of the local system, enter the URL in Image Target URL.
For example, if the image exists in a central repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
12. Use the drop-down list in Border to choose a border for the image. This option determines
the thickness of the border around the image. If ‘0’ is chosen there will be no border
around the image.
13. Enter a description for the image in Alt Text. Alternate text is important for visually
impaired users. Alternate text tells users what should appear if the image does not
display.
14. Select Yes in Launch in New Window so the image will appear in a separate browser
window. This is especially important if a URL has been entered in Image Target URL.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 65 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
15. Click Submit.
Note: The file will not appear in the Currently Attached Files field after the
page is submitted. An image tag for the file will appear in the Text box.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 66 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
FILE ATTACHMENTS
About file attachments
File attachments may be added to different places in a course, for example, to an Item, an
Assignment, or a File in a Learning Unit. There are two options for adding file attachments:
•
Files on local network: Select Browse next to Browse Local Files to navigate to a file
on the network.
•
Files in the Blackboard Content System: Select Browse next to Link to Content
Collection item to navigate to a file in the Blackboard Content System.
Users will open the file by clicking a link to the file that appears in the course. After selecting a file
to attach, users may enter a name for the link to the file. This name will appear to users, instead of
the name of the document. For example, users would see “Biology Syllabus” instead of
syllabus_bio_101.doc.
Accepted characters in file names
Blackboard allows the use of all characters in file names. However, the user's operating system
and browser may limit the types characters accepted. For example, some browsers do not accept
multi byte characters.
Recognized content attachments
The following file types are recognized by the Blackboard Learning System. These files can be
displayed within a content item.
Note: The Blackboard Learning System can recognize additional file types
and associated applications if a MIME extension is added. Contact your
System Administrator for more information about adding MIME extensions.
E XTENSION
.aam
F ILE T YPE
Multimedia
P ROGRAMS
F ILE T YPE
ASSOCIATED WITH THE
Macromedia® Authorware® plugin
Note that the .aam file is the
starting point for a series of files
that must be enclosed in a .ZIP
file.
.aiff
Audio
Audio program
.asf
Multimedia
Microsoft .NET™ Show
.au
Audio
Real Audio Player™
.avi
Video
Video player (not Macintosh®
compatible)
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
®
Page 67 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
E XTENSION
Instructor Manual
F ILE T YPE
P ROGRAMS
F ILE T YPE
ASSOCIATED WITH THE
.doc
Text
Microsoft® Word® or other word
processor
.exe
Executable
Executable file
.gif
Image
Graphics program or Web
browser
.html, .htm
Web page
HTML editor or Web browser
.jpg, .jpeg
Image
Graphics program or Web
browser
.jif
Image
Graphics program or Web
browser
.mp3
Audio
Audio program
.mpe
Audio/Video
Audio program
.mpg, .mpeg
Image
Graphics program or Web
browser
.moov,movie
Movie
QuickTime® movie
.mov
Video
Movie or media player
.pdf
Text
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®
.png
Image
Portable Network Graphics
.ppt, .pps
Slide show
Microsoft® PowerPoint® and
PowerPoint Player®
.qt
Movie
QuickTime®
.ra
Audio
Real Audio Player™
.ram
Video
Real Audio Movie™
.rm
Audio
Audio program
.rtf
Text
Rich Text Format
.swf
Multimedia
Macromedia® Shockwave® plugin
.tiff, .tif
Image
Graphics program or Web
browser
.txt
Text
Text or HTML editor, word
processor
.wav
Audio
Audio program
.wma
Audio
Audio program
.wmf
Graphic
Microsoft® Windows®
.wmv
Media/Audio
Microsoft® Windows®
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 68 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
E XTENSION
Instructor Manual
F ILE T YPE
P ROGRAMS
F ILE T YPE
ASSOCIATED WITH THE
.wpd
Text
WordPerfect® or other word
processor
.xls
Spreadsheet
Microsoft® Excel®
.zip
Text
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WinZip®
Page 69 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD SCORM, IMS, AND NLN CONTENT
Overview
The processes for adding SCORM, IMS or NLN are generally the same. Interaction options for
navigation, Gradebook options, and content options are set at this time.
Add SCORM Content
The table below details the fields on the Add and Modify SCORM Content pages.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
Add Content Package
Browse to select a SCORM package to add. This option only
appears on the Add SCORM Content page.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. Rename this on the
Modify SCORM Content page.
Text
Add instructions or other text on the Modify SCORM Content
page.
Interactions Options
Navigation Control
Type
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left
navigation menu does not appear and the viewer must use the
Next and Previous buttons to view content sequentially.
Gradebook Options
Add Gradebook Item
Select Yes to add a Gradebook Item to the Gradebook for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package and may
be modified and managed from the Gradebook once added.
Points Possible
Enter the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the
item will be given 0 points possible. This and other Gradebook
item properties can be modified and managed from the
Gradebook.
Track Attempt Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content,
such as total viewing time and question responses. From the
Modify Grade page, click the View button to see the Attempt
Details.
First Attempt Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user
does not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will
not be tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last
attempt data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 70 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F IELD
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
restrict how often the content can be viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to make
the assignment visible?
Select Yes to make the SCORM content available.
Do you want to track
number of views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item.
Use the Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
Add IMS Content
The table below details the fields on the Add IMS Content and Modify IMS Content pages.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
Add Content Package
Browse to select an IMS package to add. This option shows on
the Add IMS Content page only.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. You can rename this on
the Modify IMS Content page.
Text
To add instructions or other text, add it on the Modify IMS
Content page.
Interactions Options
Navigation Control
Type
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left
navigation menu does not appear and the viewer must use the
Next and Previous buttons to view content sequentially.
Gradebook Options
Add Gradebook Item
Selecting Yes will add a Gradebook Item to the Gradebook for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package, and can
be modified and managed from the Gradebook once added.
Points Possible
Enter the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the
item will be given 0 points possible. This and other Gradebook
item properties can be modified and managed from the
Gradebook.
Track Attempt Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content,
such as total viewing time and question responses. From the
Modify Grade page, click the View button to see the Attempt
Details.
First Attempt Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user
does not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 71 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F IELD
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
not be tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last
Attempt data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not
restrict how often the content can be viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to make
the assignment visible?
Select Yes to make the IMS content available.
Do you want to track
number of views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item.
Use the Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
Add NLN Content
The table below details the fields on the Add NLN Content and Modify NLN Content pages.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
Add Content Package
Browse to select a NLN package to add. This option shows on
the Add NLN Content page only.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. You can rename this on
the Modify NLN Content page.
Text
To add instructions or other text, add it on the Modify NLN
Content page.
Interactions Options
Navigation Control
Type
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left
navigation menu does not appear and the viewer must use the
Next and Previous buttons to view content sequentially.
Gradebook Options
Add Gradebook Item
Selecting Yes will add a Gradebook Item to the Gradebook for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package, and can
be modified and managed from the Gradebook once added.
Points Possible
Enter the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the
item will be given 0 points possible. This and other Gradebook
item properties can be modified and managed from the
Gradebook.
Track Attempt Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content,
such as total viewing time and question responses. From the
Modify Grade page, click the View button to see the Attempt
Details.
First Attempt Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 72 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F IELD
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user
does not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will
not be tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last
Attempt data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not
restrict how often the content can be viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to make
the assignment visible?
Select Yes to make the NLN content available.
Do you want to track
number of views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item.
Use the Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 73 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
FOLDERS
About Folders
Folders are useful for organizing and structuring content in a Content Area. For example,
Instructors may add folders for each week of the course to a Content Area, or organize the Content
Area by topic, such as separate folder for Assignments, Assessments, and Group Projects.
Once a folder is created, content and additional subfolders may be added to it. All of the Content
Types available in Content Areas may be added to a folder.
Add a Folder
Follow the steps below to add a folder to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Folder from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete the Add Folder page and click Submit.
Folder content availability
Availability of items in a Content Area can be established on an item-by-item basis, but the actual
display of items to users is contingent upon the availability of any parent folder on up to the root of
the content area. If any parent folder is unavailable, the items within it are unavailable. For
example, if a folder is set to Unavailable, but items within the folder are set to Available, users
would be unable to view the items within the folder.
This is also true for items with Adaptive Release rules. If a folder has a rule that makes it
unavailable to a Student, all content wihin that folder is also unavailable to the user.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 74 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CONTENT METADATA
About Content Metadata
Content Metadata stores information about a piece of content. Metadata allows for IMS
compatibility when content is imported and exported. Click Manage next to the item in the Content
Area to open the Manage item page which includes a link to Metadata.
Note: The information entered in Content Metadata cannot be
tracked or reported on. It can only be viewed on the Content
Metadata page as reference information for the Content Item.
Metadata options
The table below describes the fields on the Content Metadata page. Select Edit to display the fields
in each section.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Item Information
Title
Displays the title of the content item.
Catalog Entry
The catalog and version information in the Source and
Entry Fields. Once a Catalog Entry is made a check box
appears next to the item. Select the check box and click
Submit to remove an entry.
Source
The name of the catalog or source of the content.
Entry
The number or version of the catalog.
Language
The language of the content item.
Description
A description of the content item.
Life Cycle Information
Creation Date
Displays the date and time the content item was created.
Contributors
The names of others who contributed to this content item.
Once a Contributor is entered a check box appears next to
the item. Select the check box and click Submit to remove
a Contributor.
Person
The name of the author or editor.
Role
The role of the person, such as author, contributor, or
editor.
Organization
The name of the organization associated with the person.
Date
The date the person made these changes or updates.
Technical Information
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 75 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Resource Format
The type of application this content item uses.
Resource Location
The location of the item displays in this field.
Rights Management Information
Free Resource:
Establish if the Content was free or if it was purchased.
Copyright/Restriction
Establish if this Content is copyrighted or if it has any
restrictions.
Description
Comment on any conditions of use for this item.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 76 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
EXTERNAL LINKS
About External Links
Links to outside Web sites may be added to Content Areas as External Links. When entering a
URL, always enter the full Web address to the link. For example, enter http://www.blackboard.com,
not www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com.
Add an External Link
Follow the steps below to add an External Link to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add External Link from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete the Add External Link page with a Name, Description, and URL for the link.
Note that the URL is required.
4.
Click Submit.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 77 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE LINK
About Course Links
Course Links are used to link to other items within a course. All items that appear in the Course
Map may be linked to using a Course Link. For example, an Instructor may create a Discussion
Board where users discuss the class readings. A link to this Discussion Board may be placed in the
Content Area where the articles are posted, such as Course Documents.
Note: A Course Link may be viewed as long as it is available to
users in the course. The Course link may be opened if the user has
access to the item based on the item’s availability and adaptive
release rules. For example, if a user does not have access to the
item, a message appears when the link is selected.
Add a Course Link
Follow the steps below to add a Course Link to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Course Link from the Action Bar. The Add Course Link page appears.
3.
In Section 1 of the page enter a name and description. In Section 2, click Browse to open
the Course Map. Click the link for an item in the Course Map to select it as the Course
Link. In Section 3, set the options for the Course Link. Click Submit.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 78 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
LEARNING UNITS
About Learning Units
Learning Units enable Instructors to set a structured path for progressing through content within a
course. This allows Students to view content in an intuitive, self-paced style. All types of content,
such as items, Assignment, and Assessments may be included in a Learning Unit. The Instructor
may allow Students to access content in a Learning Unit nonlinearly or force them to view it
sequentially. For example, a Learning Unit on Shakespeare is created, including files, Assignments
and an Assessment. The Instructor may require Students to proceed through the Learning Unit in a
specific order or they may allow Students to view the contents in any order.
Content within a Learning Unit is added and managed just like content in a folder. The Learning
Unit is a shell to which other content, such as files, is added. Learning Units can be modified like
any other item within a Content Area.
Add a Learning Unit
Follow the steps below to add a Learning Unit to a course Content area.
1.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents, on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Learning Unit in the drop-down list on the Action Bar and click Go.
3.
Complete the Add Learning Unit page and click Submit.
Create a Learning Unit slide show
After a Learning Unit is added to a Content Area, a slide show within it may be created. The slide
show will allow users to view the content of the Learning Unit, sequentially.
1.
Open the Content Area that contains the Learning Unit.
2.
Click the name of the Learning Unit to open it.
3.
Select Add File in the Action Bar. The Add File page is used to add files to a Learning
Unit and create a slideshow. This includes Course Links, links to local files and links to
files in the Blackboard Content System to the Learning Unit. This option may be used
multiple times to add multiple files to a Learning Unit.
4.
Use the numbers to the left of each item to order the content. If the Learning Unit is
viewed sequentially, this is the order in which the content appears.
Sequential and non-sequential Learning Units
Learning Units may be viewed sequentially or non-sequentially. If sequential viewing is enforced,
Students will view the Learning Unit in the order items within it are listed. Students will not be able
to advance to a page within the unit without having viewed the previous page. If sequential viewing
is not enforced, items in the Learning Unit may be viewed in any order from the Contents page.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 79 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANAGING TESTS
About Tests in Content Areas
Tests are on-line evaluations that can be used to measure a Student’s understanding of the course.
Test properties, such as availability and presentation options, are managed through the Content
Area where the Test is added. For information on building Tests see the section on How to Create
an Assessment.
Note: Instructors may view and grade Tests submitted by Students in the
Gradebook, Tests submitted by Students may not be viewed or graded
from the Content Area where the Test is posted.
Add a Test to a Content Area
Follow the steps below to add a Test to a Content Area:
1.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents, on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Test on the Action Bar.
There are two options for adding a test on the Add Test page.
•
Create a New Test – Click Create.
•
Select an existing Test – Select a Test in the Add Test box and click Submit.
After a Test is added to a Content Area, the Modify Test page appears. This page includes links to
the Test Canvas page, to modify the Test itself, and to the Test Options page. The Test Options
page includes options for setting the availability, feedback, and presentation of the Test
Note: Settings on the Survey Options page are the same as the Test
Options page, with the exception of Survey Feedback.
•
Warning: A warning appears if any Students have
already taken a Test when the Modify the Test option is
selected. Certain areas of the Test will not be available
for modification if the Test has already been taken by
Students.
•
If the Instructor modifies a Test after a Student
has submitted it, the Student will view the new,
modified Test when they view their grade and
feedback. They will not view the original Assessment
they completed.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 80 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Remove a deployed Assessment
When an Assessment is removed from a Content Area it is deleted from that Content Area and the
details of any Student attempts are deleted. The Assessment will still be available in the Test
Manager or Survey Manager. Grades can be preserved, but the details of the Student attempts will
be lost.
Removing an Assessment from a Content Area does not delete the Assessment from the system.
The Assessment must be removed from the Test Manager or Survey Manager to completely delete
it from the course.
Tip: If any Students have already taken an Assessment be
cautious and consider the consequences before removing the
Assessment . It is recommended that an Assessment first be
made Unavailable before considering the more drastic step of
removing the Assessment.
Follow the steps below to remove an Assessment from a Content Area:
1.
Open the Course area from the Control Panel.
2.
Locate the Assessment and click Remove next to the Assessment.
A warning appears. Click Yes to continue.
If a Student has not yet attempted the Assessment, the Assessment will be removed from the
Course area. The Assessment is still in the Test or Survey Manager. If a Student has attempted the
Assessment, please continue to Step 5.
Select the appropriate option and click Submit.
•
Preserve - This option removes the Assessment from the Course area. Any Grades in the
Gradebook related to this Assessment will remain but the attempt itself will be deleted.
In this instance, the grade stays but the Assessment and any attempts are removed. It will
not be possible to view any of the Student’s responses to questions. This can have
serious consequences, for example, if an essay question still needs to be graded, it will
not be possible to do so after removing the Assessment because the details of the attempt
were removed.
It is important to note that if the Assessment is deployed again, it is done as a new
Assessment. There is no connection or shared data between the first and second
deployments and the Gradebook will treat each deployment as separate Gradebook
Items.
•
Remove - This option removes the Assessment from the Course area and erases any
record of the Assessment from the Gradebook. This will destroy all record of Student
performance on the Assessment.
Remove an Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager
Assessments are removed by selecting the corresponding Remove button on the Test or Survey
Manager. An Assessment can only be removed from the Test or Survey Manager if it is not
deployed in a Course area. If a Remove button does not appear for an Assessment in the Test or
Survey Manager, follow the instructions for removing a deployed Assessment before trying to
remove the Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager.
Removing an Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager destroys the Assessment but does not
have any impact on the Gradebook. Test Options
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 81 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ABOUT TEST OPTIONS
Test Options allow the Instructor to modify the name and description of a Test, as well as, set up
the availability, presentation, and feedback for a Test. These options are only available once a Test
is added to a Content Area.
After a Test is added, the Modify Test page appears, select Modify the Test Options to open the
Test Options page. To make modifications to existing Test Options select Modify next to the Test in
the Content Area.
Modify Test Availability
Test availability may only be set after a Test has been added to a Content Area. Availability is
managed on the Test Options page.
Note: When an Assessment is unavailable it is deployed to a
Content Area but a link does not appear to Students. The
unavailable Assessment can be seen when accessing the Course
area through the Control Panel.
The following are descriptions of the Test Availability options:
O PTION
D ESCRIPTION
Make the link available
Select Yes to make a link to this
Assessment appear to Students. If this
option is set to No, it will not appear to
Students. Instructors may make the
link available, then use the Display
After and Display Until fields to limit
the amount of time the link appears.
Add a new announcement for this
Test
Select Yes to create an
Announcement about the Test. The
Announcement will include the date
and state “an Assessment has been
made available in [Course area that
includes the link to the Assessment]”.
This Announcement will appear in the
course Announcements.
Allow multiple attempts
This option allows Students to take the
Test multiple times. The status of
multiple attempts is displayed to
Students at the top of the Assessment.
Select Allow unlimited attempts for
Students to take the test as many
times as they wish. Select Allow
<blank> attempts to indicate a
specific number of attempts that is
allowed. Fill in the applicable number
in the blank.
Force Completion
Students must complete the
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 82 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
O PTION
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
Assessment the first time it is
launched if Force Completion is
selected. Students may not exit the
Assessment and continue working on
it at a later date. The Save button is
available for Students to save the
Assessment as they work through it,
but they may not exit and re-enter the
Assessment.
If the Force Completion option is
enabled, it is noted and explained to
Students at the top of the Assessment.
If Force Completion is not enabled,
Students may save their progress and
complete the Assessment at another
time.
Set Timer
Select this check box to set a time limit
for finishing the Assessment. If this
option is selected, enter the amount of
time to allow for the Test in the hours
and minutes boxes below. The time
elapsed is displayed to the Student
during the Assessment. A one-minute
warning is also displayed as Students
approach the time limit.
Display After
Select the date and time when the
Test will become available to
Students. This field is optional; the
Instructor may control availability
through the Make the link available
option without setting specific dates.
Display Until
Select the date and time the Test will
be made unavailable to Students. This
field may be left blank.
Password
Select this check box to require a
password for Students to access this
Assessment. If this check box is
selected, enter a password in the field
below. Passwords cannot be longer
than 15 characters. Passwords are
case sensitive.
Include this test in Gradebook
score calculations
Select this option to include this test in
Gradebook calculations. If the test is
not included, the score will not affect
any Gradebook calculations.
Hide the score of this test from the
Gradebook
Select this option to hide this test score
in the Gradebook. If selected, this item
behaves as a survey. The display in the
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 83 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
O PTION
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
Gradebook will read Complete /
Incomplete and N/A or zero appears on
the grade detials pages.
Unavailable Assessments
There is a difference between unavailable Assessments and removed Assessments. Removed
Assessments have been removed from the Test or Survey Manager. Unavailable Assessments are
deployed to a Course area but a link does not appear to Students. The Assessment can be seen
when accessing the Course area through the Control Panel.
Assessment availability is managed on the Test Options page. Assessment availability can be
limited to a specific time period by setting the Display After and Display Until fields. The availability
can also be open ended by setting only a start date or only an end date. If the link to the
Assessment is available, but neither date is set, the Assessment is immediately and always
available.
Test Feedback
The Test feedback options determine the type of results users receive after a Test is submitted.
One or more options may be selected.
FEEDBACK MODE
D ESCRIPTION
Score
Present the final score to Students.
Submitted answers
Present the Student’s answers.
Correct answers
Present the correct answers to the
questions.
Feedback
Present the question feedback to the
Student.
Differences between Test feedback and Survey Feedback
When a Test is deployed, four options for Test Feedback appear on the Test Options page. When
a Survey is deployed, only two options are available:
•
Status – Allows Students to see if the Survey is complete or incomplete
•
Submitted answers – Allows users to see the answers they submitted.
Modify Test presentation
There are a number of options for presenting Tests to Students. These options may be modified on
the Test Options page.
The following are descriptions of each option:
O PTION
D ESCRIPTION
All at Once
Present the entire Assessment on one
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 84 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
O PTION
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
screen.
One at a Time
Display one question at a time. The
screen includes navigation tools to
move between questions. The Submit
button will only appear on the last
page of the Test.
Prohibit Backtracking
Prevent Students from returning to
questions they have already
answered. If backtracking is
prohibited, the buttons <<, <, or >> do
not appear to Students during the test.
These buttons will appear if
backtracking is not prohibited.
Randomize Questions
Display questions in a random order
each time the Assessment is taken.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 85 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ASSIGNMENTS
About Assignments
Assignments allow Instructors to create coursework and manage the grades and feedback for each
Student separately. Instructors may create Assignments that lists the name, point value and
description of the Assignment; files may also be attached. After an Assignment is added to a
Content Area, Students may access the Assignment, complete it in a separate file, and send it back
to the Instructor. The Instructor may respond to each Student separately, sending comments about
their individual Assignment and attaching files, if necessary.
Note: Once a Student completes and submits an Assignment the Instructor
may access this file in the Gradebook.
Add an Assignment
Follow the steps below to add an Assignment to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Assignment from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete the Add Assignment page and click Submit.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 86 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TOOL LINKING
About Tool Linking
Links to Tools can be placed anywhere in a course that content can. Tools such as Discussion
Board forums and Virtual Classroom sessions can exist in the same Content Area as content such
as Learning Unit slideshows, files, and Assessments. Adding tools to folders creates a seamless
experience for users because all materials related to a certain subject can be accessed from the
same location.
Instructors may also explain the context of the Tool when it is added to the Content Area, including
a description of what it is used for and attached files. For example, the Instructor may add a link to
a Discussion Board, explain that users should participate in the forum during a specific week, and
attach an article they should discuss.
Add a tool to a Content Area
Follow the steps below to add a tool to a Content Area:
1.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents, in the Control Panel.
2.
From the main Content Area page, or from any nested folder, select a tool from the dropdown list and click Go. The Add Tool page will appear.
3.
Link to the tool, an instance of the tool, or create a new instance. For example, link to the
Discussion Board page where users can select a forum, link to an existing forum directly,
or create a new forum and link to it. Click Submit to add the tool to the folder.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 87 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COPY AND MOVE CONTENT
About Copy and Move
Instructors are able to copy or move content and place it in another area within the same course or
in another course. Entire folders and Learning Units can also be copied. Instructors must have an
Instructor role in the destination course when content is moved or copied to another course.
Instructors can choose whether to delete an item after it is copied (in a move operation) or to also
keep it in its original place (in a copy operation).
Copy and Move are not available with Bb Learning System – Basic.
Note: Folders may not be copied from other parts of a course into a
Learning Unit.
Copy or Move content
Follow the steps below to copy or move a piece of content:
1.
Open the Content Area that holds the piece of content from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Copy next to the content. (If Copy does not appear, this option in not available).
The Copy or Move Item page appears.
3.
Complete the Copy or Move Item page with the following information:
•
Destination Course: Select a destination from the drop-down list for the item. Only those
courses in which the Instructor has an Instructor role appear in the list.
•
Destination Folder: Select Browse to view the Course Map. Select a folder on the
Course Map and click Submit.
•
Remove item after copy: If the item is being copied (it will exist in multiple places) select
No. If the item is being moved to a different location elect Yes. If Yes is selected the item
is removed from the current Content Area.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 88 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
THE OPEN STANDARDS CONTENT PLAYER
About the Content Player Building Block
The Content Player Building Block allows an Instructor to add content that conforms to SCORM,
IMS, or NLN standards to a course. Instructors see IMS, SCORM, and NLN (depending on which
the Administrator has made available) as additional types of content items, available in the Action
Bar dropdown list in Content Areas.
Using the Content Player in a Course
Instructors and users interact with IMS, SCORM, and NLN content just as they would other types of
content. From the users’ perspective, IMS, SCORM, or NLN content items are accessed in the
same way as any other course content. IMS, SCORM, or NLN content can even be added to a
Learning Unit.
When adding SCORM, IMS, or NLN data, the Instructor can make selections about navigation and
display. If the Instructor wishes to add an item to the Gradebook, this can also be done from the
Add Content page. In addition to giving a grade in the Gradebook, when a user interacts with the
content, the Instructor can view the user’s progress in the Gradebook including total viewing time
and completion status.
SCORM, NLN and IMS Packages
The Open Standards Content Player Building Block supports the SCORM standard and the IMS
standard for Web content, as well as NLN Content, which conforms to SCORM and IMS.
The content that is created to meet these specifications is called a package because all the files
are gathered in a zipped format. The Content Player unzips the package and accesses
components as they are needed.
Note: The Instructor does not need to know what type of package is
being uploaded. The Content Player will make this determination in
order to play the content correctly.
IMS Content
The Content Player Building Block supports content that conforms to the IMS Content and
Packaging 1.1.2 standard with the webcontent attribute. When adding this content type to a course,
it is useful to note that most of these types of packages do not track User Attempt Details.
Otherwise, no major differences will be seen.
Further information about IMS Content can be found at: http://www.imsproject.org
SCORM Content
The Content Player Building Block supports content that conforms to the SCORM 1.2 standard and
the SCORM 2004 standard. The Instructor does not need to determine ahead of time whether the
content is designed as 1.2 or 2004 compliant, as both types can be played.
Further information about SCORM Content can be found at: http://www.adlnet.org
NLN Content
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 89 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
The Content Player Building Block supports NLN content, which conforms to SCORM and IMS
standards. The United Kingdom NLN Materials Team is responsible for commissioning and
developing e-learning materials for the NLN, and offers advice on best practices in integrating the
NLN materials into teaching and learning schemes.
Further information about NLN Content can be found at: http://www.nln.ac.uk/
Who Creates the Content?
The Content packages are created to comply with the individual standards. Each institution may
have a policy on which content it uses and where the content comes from. Some institutions build
their own SCORM or IMS packages, and several private companies also produce the content.
Some content may also be available for general use.
Note: Once the user begins working with the SCORM, IMS or NLN
content, internal navigation and interaction is determined by the content
packages, not the Blackboard Learning System.
Managing the Content Types
The availability of the Content Types can be controlled on the Manage Tools page from the Control
Panel. The Content Types are controlled on the Content Type Availability page. Depending on the
Administrator’s settings, one or all of the Content Player Content types may be available for the
Instructor to use.
Attempt Data
When a Gradebook Item is associated with the SCORM, IMS or NLN content item, the Instructor
will be able to view data related to the users’ interactions with the content. This is called Attempt
Data.
The details may include the total time the user has viewed each learning object, the completion
status, responses to any questions contained in the package, and whether the response was
correct. The purpose of the attempt data is to help the Instructor in determining a score for the
Gradebook item.
To access this information on the Attempt Details page:
1.
Click Gradebook.
2.
Click on the user attempt, the Modify Grade page loads.
3.
Click View on the Modify Grade page, the Attempt Details page loads.
Note: Not all packages are designed to track all data. If the package
does not provide the information to the Blackboard Learning System,
the data will show as N/A.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 90 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SYLLABUS
About the Syllabus
A Syllabus is a type of content that may be added to any Content Area. Simply link to an existing
document that will serve as a Syllabus, or create a new Syllabus using the template provided. The
Instructor may attach a file from their local computer, or link to a file in their Content Collection if the
Content Collection has been enabled by the Administrator. Creating a new Syllabus allows the user
to pre-build as many lessons as needed, or build lessons one at a time. Additionally, the user can
apply custom designs to the Syllabus.
Tip: When using the Syllabus tool to create a new Syllabus, the user
may first create a custom Content Area just for the Syllabus. Adding the
Syllabus to it’s own Content Area allows easy access and will not
compete for attention with anything else in the Content Area.
Add a Syllabus
Follow the steps below to add a Syllabus to a course Content Area.
1.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents, on the Control Panel or in the Edit
View of the page.
2.
Select Syllabus in the drop-down list on the Action Bar and click Go.
3.
Complete the Add Syllabus page and click Submit.
4.
If the option to Create a new Syllabus was selected, see more information in Creating a
new Syllabus.
5.
If the option to Use an Existing File was selected, the file will be attached to the Add Item
page. For more information, see the documentation for Add Item.
Use an existing file or use the Syllabus Builder
Two options are available for adding a Syllabus; attach an existing file or create a Syllabus using
the Syllabus Builder.
Attaching a file prompts the Instructor to select a file from their local computer. Linking to an item in
the Content Collection allows the Instructor to select an item in the Content Collection. Either of
these options will create a Syllabus that simply opens the attached or linked document. No design
options are available for this selection.
Selecting to use the Syllabus Builder takes to the user to the Syllabus creation page. The Syllabus
Builder allows the user to batch create lesson shells, and apply custom designs to the Syllabus.
The lessons may be added, modified, reordered or removed at anytime. The design options may
be changed even after the Syllabus has been created.
Create a new Syllabus
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 91 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
The first section of the Syllabus creation page provides three text boxes with suggested names for
the content: Description, Topics and Required Materials. The titles are editable and any content
may be included or not included in the text boxes.
The user can select a design option and customize the colors and patterns of the design. For more
information, see Designing a Syllabus.
Lesson shells, which are placeholders for a set number of lessons the user wishes to add to the
Syllabus, may be created by selecting Build Lessons and entering the number of lessons to be
created.
Note: Build Lessons is only available upon creation. Once a Syllabus has
been created, the user should create lessons by clicking Add Lesson on
the Action bar of the Lessons page. See Syllabus Lessons for more
information.
Clicking Submit takes the user to the next page for creating, modifying, ordering and removing
Lessons. See Syllabus Lessons for more information.
Designing a Syllabus
The Syllabus provides six style options: Document image, Notepad, Modern, Classic,
Contemporary, or None. Each style is unique, with a dramatic header font and thin or thick borders
around the content. Some styles allow the user to select from a list of patterns for the background.
The table below describes the design and optional settings for each style.
S YLLABUS S TYLES
Style
Description
Color options
Document image
Mainly white with an image of a
document faintly visible in the
background.
Headers, borders, text
Notepad
Similar to the appearance of a piece of
notebook paper, the background
contains faint blue horizontal lines.
Headers, borders, text
Modern
A thin border surrounds the entire
Syllabus.
Headers, borders, text,
background (color or pattern)
Classic
A wider frame around the entire
Syllabus.
Headers, borders, text, frame,
background (color or pattern)
Contemporary
A wider frame surrounds the content,
but is separated into two boxes by the
Lessons header.
Headers, borders, text, frame,
background (color or pattern)
None
The item is styled like other content
items with no borders or frames.
Headers, text
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 92 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Syllabus Lessons
Submitting the Create Syllabus page takes the user to the next part of the Syllabus Builder, the
Lessons page. This is also the page that appears when Modify is selected on the Content Area
page once the Syllabus has been created.
The content on the Lessons page is displayed with the design chosen on the Create Syllabus page.
The Modify button at the top of the header information directs the user to the Create Syllabus
page. Clicking Modify allows the user to change the description and other text at the top of the
Syllabus, as well as the style and content options such as date of availability.
Lessons are listed below the header information. Lessons may be added, removed, modified or
reordered from this list. To add a lesson, click Add Lesson on the Action bar. Lessons may include
a date and time, or use the checkboxes to not display a date or time.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 93 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADAPTIVE RELEASE
About Adaptive Release
Adaptive Release of Content provides controls to release content to users based on a set of rules
provided by the Instructor. The rules may be related to availability, date and time, individual users
and user groups (such as course Groups), scores or attempts on any Gradebook item, or review
status of another item in the course.
This feature may be used by all Instructors and course developers. Some Instructors and course
developers may choose to take advantage of advanced rule functionality to create sophisticated
combinations of release rules on items. Others may utilize the basic rule functionality to release
content to specific users or groups and/or to allow users to view content based on their
performance on an assignment.
The following options are available:
•
Adaptive Release – Create basic rules for an item. Only one rule per item may be created.
•
Adaptive Release: Advanced – Create advanced rules for an item. Multiple rules may be
created.
•
User Progress – View the details on an item for all users in a course. This page includes
information on whether the item is visible to the user and whether the user has marked the
item as reviewed.
Adaptive Release rules and criteria
An Adaptive Release rule consists of a set of criteria that defines the visibility of a content item to
users. Criteria are the parts that make up the rule. For example, date and membership are two
types of different criteria. Each content item may have multiple rules, and each rule may consist of
multiple criteria. To view an item, a user must meet all of the requirements of the rule. This means
that if a rule has multiple criteria, the user must meet all criteria before the item is available.
For example, the Instructor may add an Assignment to a course. One rule for this Assignment may
allow all users in Group A to view the Assignment after a specific date. This rule would consist of
Membership criteria and Date criteria. Another rule for this Assignment may allow all users in
Group B to view the Assignment once they had completed Homework #1. This rule would consist of
Membership criteria and Gradebook criteria.
Note: Only one Membership criteria and one Date criteria may be created
for each rule. Multiple Gradebook criteria and Review Status criteria may
be added to each rule.
Enable and disable the Adaptive Release feature
The System Administrator controls the availability of the Adaptive Release feature. If this feature is
made available, course developers may add either basic or advanced Adaptive Release Rule.
If the Adaptive Release tool is disabled by the Administrator, all rules that have been created will
disappear. Also, Adaptive Release related links on the Manage page will no longer appear. If the
tool is later re-enabled, the links on the Manage page will reappear and any data associated with
Adaptive Release (such as the rules) will be saved. Any Adaptive Release rules that had previously
been set also re-appear.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 94 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Visibility of items with Adaptive Release rules
Once any Adaptive Release rules have been established for an item, visibility of that item is
restricted to those users who meet the criteria of those rules.
For example, the Instructor creates a content item called “Introduction” and makes the item
available in Course Documents. At this point, all course users would be able to see Introduction.
The Instructor then creates a rule restricting the item to Group A users. Now, only members of
Group A can see Introduction—all other course users (who are not a member of Group A) do not
see Introduction. The Instructor then adds other criteria to this rule, restricting it to Group A
members who have received at least an 80 on Test #1. Now, only members of Group A who have
also received an 80 or greater on the Test #1 will see Introduction. All other course users, including
Group A members who scored less than an 80 on the Pre-Test, will not see Introduction.
If no Adaptive Release Rules have been created, the item is available to all users in the course
depending on the item availability and date / time availability set on the Add Item page.
View availability of an item on User Progress page
Instructors may create one or more Adaptive Release rules which narrow the availability of a
content item. It may be difficult to remember which users in a course may access each piece of
content. The User progress page displays details on the visibility of a content item and the Adaptive
Release rules pertaining to it. For example, this page lists the visibility of an item on a user-by-user
basis. If Review Status is enabled for the item, an icon is displayed to show whether the user has
reviewed the item or not along with a date and time stamp for when the review was registered for
that user.
If no Adaptive Release rules have been created for that item, the visibility column is based simply
on availability of the item itself. For example, if the item is available, the Visible icon is displayed for
all users.
Differences between basic Adaptive Release and Advanced Adaptive Release
Advanced Adaptive Release allows users to create multiple rules per item. If a user wants to create
different criteria for different users on the same item, the user will need to create more than one
rule. For example, if different rules apply for different Groups in a course Advanced Adaptive
Release is used. The Instructor may set up a rule for Group A that enabled all users in the Group to
view an item once they receive an 85 on a Test. The Instructor may set up a separate rule for
Group B that enables them to see the same content item after they receive an 80 on the Test.
Unavailable items and Adaptive Release rules
Item availability set on the Add Item page supersedes all Adaptive Release rules. If the item is
unavailable, it is unavailable to all users regardless of any rules established. This allows course
developers to build out their rules and only make items available when they are finished with rule
creation.
View content with rules through the course
If Instructors view Content Areas through the course as a Student would (as opposed to through
the Control Panel or Quick Edit), their view is based on item availability and Adaptive Release
rules. For example, if Adaptive Release is used to make an item available to a Group, and they are
not a member of the Group, they will not see the item if they access it through the Course Menu.
The same is true for unavailable items. If an item is added to a course, but is not made available,
the Instructor will not see it when they access the Content Area through the Course Menu.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 95 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADAPTIVE RELEASE FUNCTIONS
Add a basic Adaptive Release rule
The Basic Adaptive Release rule allows the user to add and modify one rule for a single piece of
content. This single rule may have multiple criteria. For example, the rule may require the user to
meet both date criteria and review status criteria before the content is available.
Note: Use Advanced Adaptive Release rules to add multiple rules to a
single piece of content.
Follow the steps below to add a basic Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release. The Adaptive Release page appears.
4.
Complete one or more sections of the Adaptive Release page and select Submit.
Add an Advanced Adaptive Release rule
Advanced Adaptive Release allows Instructors to add multiple rules to a single content item. If
multiple rules are created, the content is visible to the user if any of the rules are met. Each rule
may have multiple criteria. For example, one rule may allow users in Group A with a score above
an 85 on a Test to view the content item. Another rule for the same item may allow users in Group
B to view the same content item only after a specific date.
Follow the steps below to add an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter a name for the rule
and click Submit.
5.
Use the options in the Action Bar on the Manage Criteria page to build the rule. For
example, select Add Date to add date criteria to the rule. When that criteria is complete,
another option in the Action Bar may be selected to build on the rule. Select OK when the
rule is complete.
6.
Repeat Step 4 thru Step 6 to add multiple criteria to an item.
Copy an Adaptive Release rule
Instructors may find it beneficial to copy an Adaptive Release rule, rather than creating a new one
from scratch. Once the rule is copied the name may be changed and the rule modified. Rules may
only be copied within a single content item; a rule from one content item may not be copied to
another content item.
Follow the steps below to copy an Adaptive Release Rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 96 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
2.
Select Manage next to the content item with the rule you would like to copy. The Manage
page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click the checkbox next to the rule you would like to copy and select Copy in the Action
Bar.
5.
An exact replica of the rule appears at the bottom of the list. It has the same name as the
original rule with ‘Copy of’ in the beginning.
6.
Click Modify next to the new rule to make changes to the name or criteria.
Modify an Adaptive Release rule
Rules are managed and modified from the Adaptive Release page. The criteria of a rule and the
name of a rule are managed separately.
Follow the steps below to modify the name of a rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Select Manage next to the Rule that needs to be updated. The Manage Rule page
appears. Modify the Rule Name and select Submit.
Follow the steps below to modify the criteria of an advanced rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Select Modify next to the Rule that needs to be updated. The Manage Criteria page
appears. Criteria may be added, modified, and removed. Select OK when the changes are
complete.
5.
Repeat Step 4 to change any additional rules related to the content item.
Follow the steps below to modify a basic Adaptive Release Rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release. The Adaptive Release page appears.
4.
Make any necessary changes and select Submit.
Note: These steps may also be used to modify a rule with one criteria
created on the Advanced Adaptive Release page.
Remove an Adaptive Release rule
Follow the steps below to remove an Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item with the rule you would like to remove. The
Manage page appears.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 97 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click the checkbox next to the rule you would like to remove. Multiple rules may be
selected. Click Remove.
Note: Basic Adaptive Release rules are also removed from the Adaptive
Release: Advanced page.
Adaptive Release rules during copy, archive, and export
Adaptive Release rules and user progress information are only included during a full course copy
with users and during archive and restore operations. Rules and user progress information are not
saved during a copy of course materials into a new course or during a copy of course materials into
an existing course. They are also not saved during export and import operations.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 98 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADAPTIVE RELEASE CRITERIA
About Adaptive Release Criteria
Criteria are the parts that define an Adaptive Release rule. Instructors have the option of applying
one or more criteria to each rule. For example, one rule may make content available after a specific
date, while another rule, with multiple criteria, may make content available to a course Group after
a specific date. There are a number of different types of criteria available to Instructors.
The following is a brief description of each available criteria:
C RITERIA
D ESCRIPTION
Date / Time
Display content based on a date or time. Options include:
•
after a specific date
•
until a specific date
•
after a specific date and until a specific date
Username
Display content to one or more users.
Group
Display content to members of one or more Groups in a course.
Gradebook: Item
with at least one
attempt
Display content based on a recorded attempt by the user. For
example, the user has completed the Test or a grade has been
entered for an Assignment.
Gradebook: Item
with a specific
score
Display content based on a required score. Options include:
•
less than or equal to
•
greater than or equal to
•
equal to
Gradebook: Item
with a score
between X and Y
Display content based on a range of scores. For example, if a
Student scores between 85 and 100 on an exam.
Review Status an
item
Display content to the user only after an associated item has
been marked Reviewed by the user.
About Date Criteria
Date criteria enables content to be displayed according to date and time. Content may be displayed
after a specific date, until a specific date, or after a specific date and until a specific date. For
example, the Instructor may use the date criteria to release lecture notes only after the lecture has
occurred or the date criteria option could be used to give one Group, such as Students with
learning disabilities, more time to access content than another Group would receive.
Dates for availability may be set when the item is created or modified under options or through a
Date criteria rule. The Instructor may decide to use both the date restrictions on the Modify page
and the Date criteria rule. For example, the item can be made available on the Modify page from
December 1 – December 30. Then the item may be made available to one small group of users
from December 1 – December 15 and another small group of users from December 16 –
December 30.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 99 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Note: If the date is changed on the item itself, for example on the Modify
Item page, and date criteria already exist, a warning message appears. The
same is true if the user attempts to add date criteria and a date for the item
has been set on the Add or Modify page.
Add Date criteria to a rule
Date criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive Release rules
and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a rule, in addition
to date criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
Follow the steps below to add date criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
To add a new rule, select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter
a name for the rule and click Submit. Alternatively, the criteria may be added to an
existing rule. In this case, select Modify next to a rule on the Adaptive Release page.
5.
Select Date in the Action Bar. The Date page appears.
D ATE C RITERIA
S ETTING
Display an item
after a specific
date
Click the checkbox next to Display After. Select a date and time
in the drop-down lists below. The item will appear to users after
this date and time.
Display an item
until a specific date
Click the checkbox next to Display Until. Select a date and time
in the drop-down lists below. The item will appear to users until
this date and time.
Display an item
after a specific
date and until a
specific date
Click the checkbox next to Display After and Display Until.
Select a date and time in the drop-down lists below. The item
will appear to users between these dates and times.
About Membership Criteria
Membership criteria allow content to be displayed according to username and course Group. The
Instructor may set up criteria that use one or both of these options; the Instructor may make this
item available to a course Group, or the Instructor may make this item available to a course Group
and other specific individuals.
Make content available to specific users
Membership criteria are useful for making content available to a specific user. For example, if a
Student requests a way to earn more points for class the Instructor may agree, but decide to not
offer this option to the entire course. The Instructor creates an extra credit content item and only
releases it to the single Student through the Membership criteria.
Make content available to Groups
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 100 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Membership criteria may be used to manage content for Groups within a course. For example, a
class is divided into three groups and each group has a different assignment. They are instructed to
learn the topic and then present the material to the entire class. The Instructor has materials for
each Group. The Instructor loads the material for Group 1 as content items, and releases the
material only to Group 1. Then the Instructor loads the material for Group 2 as content items, and
releases that material only to Group 2. This same process is used for Group 3. When a Group
presents the material to the class, the Instructor may then change the release rule on that material
so it becomes available to the entire class. (Alternatively, if the Instructor knows the date of
presentation ahead of time, the Date criteria may be used to make the content available for the rest
of the class.)
Add Membership criteria to a rule
Membership criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive Release
rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a rule, in
addition to Membership criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
Follow the steps below to add Membership criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
To add a new rule, select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter
a name for the rule and click Submit. Alternatively, the criteria may be added to an
existing rule. In this case, select Modify next to a rule on the Adaptive Release page.
5.
Select Membership in the Action Bar. The Membership page appears.
M EMBERSHIP
C RITERIA
S ETTING
Make content
available to
specific users
In the Username field enter one or more usernames, separated
by commas or click Browse to search the system. Use the
Search for User window to search for and select usernames to
add to the field. Selected Usernames appear at the bottom of
the section.
Make content
available to
Groups
All Groups in the course appear in Available Course Groups,
even those that are unavailable. Use the arrows to move
Groups from the Available Course Groups field to the
Selected field. Content is displayed to all of the Groups that
appear in the Selected field.
About Gradebook criteria
Gradebook criteria may be used to release content based on item attempt and score. A number of
different score values may be selected, including the following:
•
A score greater than a set value
•
A score less than a set value
•
A score that equals a specific value
•
A score that falls within a range of values
Make content available based on Gradebook attempt
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 101 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Gradebook criteria are useful for Instructors who want to make content visibility dependent on
attempts made by Students on Assessments or Assignments. An Instructor may prepare a pre-test
for Students to prepare for the final. The idea is for the Students to pre-test themselves before
seeing the review materials, to know how much they recall without extra studying. Using
Gradebook criteria the Instructor creates the review materials, but only releases it to Students who
have attempted the pre-test test at least once.
Another example of attempt based criteria is end-of-term surveys. Some institutions require end-ofterm surveys about the course, before the final exam is taken. In this case, the Instructor can make
the final exam item available only after the survey is attempted at least once.
Make content available based on Gradebook score
Gradebook criteria may be used to make content available based on the score a Student receives.
Many courses rely on progression, such as foreign languages, where Students must learn one
topic before moving onto another. If an Instructor is about to teach advanced verb conjugation, but
wants Students to have passed the assignment on basic verb conjugation, the Instructor can create
a rule that allows only those Students who have received at least a 70 on the basic verb
conjugation assignment to view the advanced verb conjugation material.
Instructors can also establish a range of values for content release, such as releasing an item only
to users who scored between a 70 and 80 and might need some remediation, but less remediation
than users who received less than a 70. In this case, the Instructor creates two content items and
releases one to users who fall into the 70-80 range and releases the other to Students who
received less than a 70.
Add Gradebook criteria to a rule
Gradebook criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive Release
rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a rule, in
addition to Gradebook criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
Tip: Only one Gradebook item may be selected for each Gradebook
criteria. For example, one criteria may not be used to make an item
visible based on the score of two different Gradebook items. However,
multiple Gradebook criteria may be added to a single Advanced
Adaptive Release rule. The Instructor may set up one criteria that
makes Project A available after Test #1 is complete and another criteria
in the same rule that makes Project A available after Test #2 is
complete. In this example, only Students who have completed Test #1
and Test #2 may view Project A.
Follow the steps below to add Gradebook criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
To add a new rule, select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter
a name for the rule and click Submit. Alternatively, the criteria may be added to an
existing rule. In this case, select Modify next to a rule on the Adaptive Release page.
5.
Select Gradebook Item in the Action Bar. The Gradebook Item page appears.
6.
Select the Gradebook item this criteria is based on in the Select Gradebook Item dropdown list. Only one item may be selected.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 102 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
G RADEBOOK
C RITERIA
S ETTING
Make content
available based on
Gradebook attempt
Select the option Item has at least one attempt.
Make content
available based on
less than, greater
than, or equal to
score
Use the options in the Score drop-down list to select Less
Than, Greater Than, or Equal To. Enter a number in the field
for the score this criteria is based on; this must be an integer.
Make content
available for a
score within a
range of values
Select the option Score between _ and _. Enter the range of
values in the fields within this option.
About Review Status criteria
Review Status criteria is used to release content based on the user’s review of a specific content
item. For example, the Instructor may create criteria that makes Assignment #1 available only after
Students have marked Homework #1 reviewed.
Add Review Status criteria to a rule
Review Status criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive
Release rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a
rule, in addition to Review Status, to further narrow the availability of an item. Review Status may
be applied to a Learning Unit but may not be applied to indvidual files within a Learning Unit.
Follow the steps below to add Review Status criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
To add a new rule, select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter
a name for the rule and click Submit. Alternatively, the criteria may be added to an
existing rule. In this case, select Modify next to a rule on the Adaptive Release page.
5.
Select Review Status in the Action Bar. The Review Status page appears.
6.
Select Browse to open the Course Map. Click an item in the Course Map to select it for
Review Status criteria. Review Status will be turned on for this item. Users must mark the
item reviewed before the content including this rule is available.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 103 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
REVIEW STATUS
About Review Status
The Review Status tool allows the Instructor to track user review of specific content items. Once the
Instructor enables the tool for an item, each Student tracks their progress. A Mark Reviewed button
appears on the item when the user opens the Content Area. After reviewing the item, the Student
selects this button to mark it Reviewed. The Instructor may check the status of Student reviews on
the User Progress page.
If the Review Status tool is enabled by the System Administrator, it is on by default in all courses.
Disable Review Status in a course
If the Review Status tool is disabled at the Administrator or course level, the Review Status links on
the Manage page disappear and the Review / Mark Reviewed buttons on the course pages no
longer appear. If the tool is later re-enabled, those links and buttons reappear and any data
associated with Review Status (such as an individual user’s progress) is restored.
Follow the steps below to disable Review Status in a course:
1.
Select Manage Tools under Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Tool Availability on the Manage Tools page. The Tool Availability page appears.
3.
A check appears in the checkbox next to Review Status. Click this checkbox so the check
disappears. Click Submit.
Enable Review Status for an item
When Review Status is enabled for an item a Mark Reviewed button appears next to the item when
the Content Area is opened by the user. The user must select this button to mark the item
Reviewed.
Follow the steps below to enable Review Status for an item in a course:
1.
Open the Content Area that includes the item from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Review Status. The Review Status page appears.
4.
Select Enable and click Submit. The new status appears on the Manage page
underneath the Review Status link.
View the status of user reviews
Once Review Status is enabled for an item, the Instructor may check the status of Student reviews
from the User Progress page or the Performance Dashboard. These pages both indicate whether
or not a Student has marked an item as ‘Reviewed’.
The User Progress page allows the Instructor to see the Review Status of the item for all users in
the course. Follow the steps below to open the User Progress page:
1.
Open the Content Area that includes the item you would like to check from the Control
Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 104 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
3.
Instructor Manual
Select Review Status: User Progress. A check box appears in the Reviewed column
next to each user who has marked the item as Reviewed. The time and date of the review
also appear.
The Performance Dashboard allows the Instructor to see the Review Status of all currently
available items for a single user in the course. Follow the steps below to view the status of the item
on the Performance Dashboard:
1.
Select Performance Dashboard under Assessments on the Control Panel. The
Performance Dashboard appears
2.
Select the number under the Review Status column next to the user in question. The
Review Status page for this user appears. The Instructor may check the Review Status for
each item that has Review Status Enabled, either through an Adaptive Release Rule or
the Review Status option.
OR
Click the Adaptive Release icon to open the Course Map. The Map displays the Review
Status for all items in the course for that user.
Note: If the user changes the status of an individual item from Reviewed to
Mark Reviewed, all record of the previous status is erased. The Instructor
will not be alerted to the change other than by seeing the new status in the
User Progress page or in the Performance Dashboard.
Review Status during course copy, archive and export
Review Status settings and user status information are only included during a full course copy with
users and during archive and restore operations. Review Status settings and status information are
not saved during a copy of course materials into a new course or during a copy of course materials
into an existing course. The same is true for export and import operations.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 105 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
USER PROGRESS
About User Progress
The User Progress page tracks the availability and review status for a specific content item. This
page is only available if Adaptive Release or Review Status is enabled. The Instructor may use this
page to view all users in the course, the availability of the item to them, the Review Status, and the
date and time the item was reviewed. If Adaptive Release rules have been created, a rule summary
is also displayed.
View User Progress
The User Progress page lists all enrolled users in a course. A link to each rule at the top of the
page allows the Instructor to view and modify rules for this item.
All columns with unique information in the list may be sorted. Each user’s first and last name,
username, and role are noted. Additionally, the user’s visibility for the item is listed. If the item is
visible to the user an open eye appears in the column. If the item is not visible to the user the eye
appears closed. The Review Status also appears on the page, along with the date the item was
reviewed. This column only appears if Review Status is enabled for the item, either through the
Review Status option or through an Adaptive Release Rule.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 106 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
PERFORMANCE DASHBOARD
About the Performance Dashboard
The Performance Dashboard tool provides a window into all types of user activity in a course or
organization. All users enrolled in the course are listed, with pertinent information about that user’s
progress and activity in the course.
Enable the Performance Dashboard
If the System Administrator has made this tool available, it may be accessed by selecting
Performance Dashboard under Assessments on the Control Panel.
View the Performance Dashboard
Administrators must enable the Performance Dashboard for it to appear in courses. If enabled by
the Administrator, the Performance Dashboard will be on by default in all courses. The
Performance Dashboard is accessed through the Assessment area of the Control Panel. This page
displays the following information
•
Last Name
•
First Name
•
Username
•
Role
•
Date / time of last login
•
Days since last login
•
Review Status - Only displayed if this tool is enabled. Displays how many items have been
reviewed; a detailed view of items may be opened in a new window.
•
Early Warning - Shows the number of warnings and the number of total rules that may
trigger a warning. Clicking on the data in this column will open the Early Warning System.
The Early Warning System column will only display if the tool is turned on in the course.
•
Adaptive Release - Only displayed if this tool is enabled. An overview of the Student path
may be opened in a new window.
•
Discussion Board - Only displayed if this tool is enabled. Provides links to the Discussion
Board comments.
•
View Grades - Only displayed if the Gradebook is enabled. Provides links to the
Gradebook: User Grade List page for that user.
Users can click Print to open the page in a new window in a printer-friendly format. All applicable
columns may be sorted.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 107 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Understanding the Review Status indicator
The numbers provided in the Review Status column of the Performance Dashboard indicate the
number of items that the Student has marked as Reviewed.
Using Adaptive Release rules in a course creates multiple tracks for Students to progress through.
This allows for the possibility that each Student will have a different requirement for marking certain
items in a course as Reviewed. At any time in a course, items in a Student’s track may or may not
be visible to them. The Performance Dashboard provides an at-this-moment view of the item
availability and the Student’s progress on reviewing items.
The Review Status indicator links to a list of the items that the course user sees as Reviewed and
Mark Reviewed in the course.
The Review Status column is only visible if Review Status has been enabled for the course.
Link to Adaptive Release
The Adaptive Release indicator in the Performance Dashboard for each user opens the Course
Map, showing every possible item in the course. Icons beside each item in the Course Map indicate
the visibility of an item to that course user, and the review status of any items with a review
requirement, if applicable.
A D APTIVE R ELEASE
AND
R EVIEW S TATUS
ICONS :
Visible – this item is visible to that course user.
Invisible – this item is not visible to that course user.
Reviewed – this item has been marked as Reviewed by the course user.
Mark Reviewed – this item is displayed as Mark Reviewed to the course user.
The Adaptive Release column is only visible if Adaptive Release has been enabled for the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 108 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
STATISTICS TRACKING
About Statistics Tracking
Statistics Tracking at the content item level allows Instructors to view detailed statistics on content
item usage for all course users. In addition to the availability and Review Status information
available on the User Progress page, these detailed statistics can help Instructors determine how
many times the particular content item was viewed and exactly when it was accessed. Select
Manage next to an item in a Content area to enable, disable and view Statistics Tracking.
Statistics Tracking is separate from Course Statistics accessed from the Control Panel. Course
Statistics provides information about Content Area access versus the item-by-item access
displayed on the Statistics Tracking page for a content item.
Turning Statistics Tracking On and Off
The Instructor can turn Statistics Tracking on from the Manage page of any content item:
1.
Select Manage next to an item in the Content Area. The current status is displayed on this
page.
2.
Select Statistics Tracking. The Statistics Tracking page appears.
3.
Select Enable/Disable Tracking.
4.
Select Enable to turn tracking on.
To disable Statistics Tracking, follow the same steps as above. In Step 3 select Disable on the
Enable/Disable Tracking page.
Note: Statistics are only stored in the database when Statistics Tracking is
enabled. If Statistics Tracking is turned on after some users have
accessed the content item, the record of their access cannot be
recovered. Data will only be displayed for those users who access the
content item after Statistics Tracking was turned on.
Viewing Statistics for a Content Item
When Statistics Tracking is enabled, the View Statistics link is active on the Statistics Tracking
page. (This link is displayed, but not in an active state, if Statistics Tracking is not enabled for the
content item.)
Follow the steps below to view statistics for a content item:
1.
Select Manage next to an item in the Content Area. The current status is displayed on this
page.
2.
Select Statistics Tracking. The Statistics Tracking page appears.
3.
Select View Statistics on the Statistics Tracking page.
4.
Select the Time Period for the report
5.
Select the appropriate Users filter: All Users or Selected Users. Press CTRL to select
more than one user from the list.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 109 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
6.
Instructor Manual
Select Submit to run the report.
The report displays three sections of data: Access by Date, Access by Hour of the Day, and Access
by Day of the Week. The Access by Date section displays information for all enrolled users. Access
information for system guests and unenrolled users (previously enrolled users who were removed
from the course) is displayed under the Guest user. Observer access to content items is not
tracked.
Modifying, Printing and Exporting a Report
To change the report query (to add more users, remove users, or change the date range) select
Change Filter. Modify the Time Period and/or Users selected as appropriate and select Submit to
run the report.
To send the report to a printer in a printer-friendly format, select Print. The report will be printed
exactly as it is displayed on the screen.
To export the report data for further, off-line data analysis, select Export Data. Save the data using
the File Download pop-up windows that appears. The comma-separated values (CSV) file can now
be opened in any statistical analysis program (such as Microsoft Excel).
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 110 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE TOOLS
Overview
Course Tools are communication and collaboration tools that enhance interaction between users.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Announcements
Provides details for posting important information about the
course, such as assignment due dates, content changes or
guest speakers.
Course Calendar
Provides all the details for posting course-related events on a
Calendar.
Staff Information
Describes how to post information about Instructors, Teaching
Assistants, and guest speakers for the course.
Tasks
Explains how to organize course projects, priorities, and
details.
Send Email
Provides information on how to send email to other participants
or groups of participants within a course.
Digital Drop Box
Provides information for exchanging files between the
Instructor and course participants.
Messages
Explains how messages are sent to users within a course.
Glossary
Explains how to create and modify the course Glossary. The
Glossary may also be uploaded and downloaded.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 111 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE ANNOUNCEMENTS
Overview
Announcements post timely information critical to course success. The Instructor can add, modify,
and remove announcements from the Announcements page. This is an ideal place to post timesensitive material such as:
•
when assignments are due
•
changes in the syllabus
•
corrections/clarifications of materials
•
exam schedules
When adding an Announcement, Instructors can also send the Announcement as an email to
Students in the course. This ensures that Students receive the announcement even if they do not
login to the course.
Find this page
Click Announcements in Course areas on the Control Panel to open the Announcements page.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
add an announcement
Add Announcement. The Add Announcement
page will appear.
view announcements for a
different time period
a tab to view events for the current day, last 30
days, the last seven days, or all announcements.
View Last 7 days is the default.
modify an announcement
Modify. The Modify Announcement page will
appear.
remove an announcement
Remove. A confirmation box will appear.
Removing an Announcement is irreversible.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 112 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD OR MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT
Overview
The Add Announcement page is used to add Announcements to the Course. The Announcements
will appear in the order posted with the most recent Announcements appearing first.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Announcement page.
1.
Click Announcements in Course areas of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Announcement or Modify.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add Announcement Page and Modify Announcement
page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Announcement Information
Subject
Enter a subject for the announcement. This will appear as
the title of the announcement.
Message
Enter the announcement by either typing directly into the
field or copy and paste text from another word processing
document.
Options
Permanent
Announcement
Select Yes to create a permanent Announcement. This
Announcement is automatically displayed after the time
and date it is created. There is no end date for this
Announcement, unless the Display Until option is
selected.
Choose date
restrictions
Use these options to display an Announcement for a
specific period of time. Select the date the Announcement
begins in Display After and the date the Announcement
ends in Display Until.
Course Link
Link Location
Click Browse to locate content in the course to link to the
Announcement. If the link points to a content item that is
not available the link will not appear in the Announcement
until the content is available.
Note that removing the content will remove the link to the
content in the Announcement but The Announcement itself
will remain.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 113 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Email Announcement
Select this option to send an email to all Course users with
the contents of the Announcements. This will ensure that
all users are aware of the Announcement even if they do
not login to the Course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 114 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
STAFF INFORMATION
Overview
The Staff Information page allows Instructors to post information about themselves, Teaching
Assistants, guest speakers, and other Course leaders. The page gives users a resource to look up
names, email addresses, office hours, and photographs.
Find this page
To open the Staff Information page, click Staff Information in Course areas on the Control Panel.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
add a staff profile
Add Profile. The Add Profile page will appear.
add a new folder
Add Folder. The Add Folder page will appear.
modify a profile
Modify. The Modify Profile page will appear.
modify a folder
Modify. The Modify Folder page will appear.
remove an item or
folder
Remove. A warning will appear. Removing a staff profile or
folder is irreversible.
order profiles
the drop-down arrow and select a number. The items will
appear on the Staff Information page in the order selected.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 115 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD OR MODIFY PROFILE
Overview
Staff profiles may be added or modified through the Add Profile or Modify Profile page. The fields
on the Add Profile page and Modify Profile page are the same. The Add Profile page opens with
empty fields while the Modify Profile page opens with a profile already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Profile page.
1.
Click Staff Information in Course areas of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Profile. To modify a profile, click Modify.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add Profile or Modify Profile page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Profile Information
Title
Enter the staff member’s title. This title will appear before
the first name.
First Name
Enter a first name.
Last Name
Enter a last name.
Email
Enter an e-mail address.
Work Phone
Enter a work phone.
Office Location
Enter an office location.
Office Hours
Enter office hours.
Notes
Enter any additional information about the staff member.
Options
Do you want to make
the Profile visible
Select Yes or No to make the profile available to Students.
If No is selected, none of the information entered on this
page will appear to Students.
Current Image
The image that currently appears with the Staff Profile.
Profile image
Enter the path to a graphic file with a picture of the staff
member or click Browse to search for a file. This image will
be included next to the staff profile on the Staff Information
page.
Personal link
Enter the URL for the staff member’s home page. When
adding a URL, do so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 116 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F IELD
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com. This link appears
with the staff profile on the Staff Information page.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 117 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CALENDAR
Overview
Instructors can use the Calendar to indicate important course related events. The dates and events
that appear on the Calendar are for all users in the course.
Some typical items Instructors may include in the calendar are:
•
section meetings
•
assignment due dates
•
exams
•
guest speakers
Find this page
Click Course Calendar in Course Tools to open the Calendar page.
Functions
To use the functions available on the Calendar page, follow the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
create an event and
add it to the Calendar
Add Event. The Add Calendar Event page will appear.
view events for a
specific date and time
Quick Jump. The Quick Jump page will appear. Select a
date and time and the calendar will immediately display
events for that time.
view events by day,
week, or month
the corresponding tab to view events for the current day,
current week, current month, or current year.
view previous or future
events
the right arrow to view future events or left arrow to view
previous events.
view event details
the calendar event to view details, such as date, time, and
event category.
modify an event
Modify corresponding to an event to make changes.
Remove an event
Remove corresponding to an event to remove it from the
calendar. This action is irreversible.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 118 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD OR MODIFY CALENDAR EVENT
Overview
Events may be added or modified by accessing the Add Calendar Event page or Modify Calendar
Event page. The fields on the Add Calendar Event page and Modify Calendar Event page are the
same. The Add Calendar Event page opens with empty fields where as the Modify Calendar Event
page opens with an event already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Calendar Event page.
1.
Click Course Calendar in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Event from the Calendar page. To modify an event, click Modify next to an
event and the Modify Event page will appear.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add Event page and Modify Event page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Event Information
Event Title
Enter the title of the event. This title will appear on the
Calendar page at the date and time indicated on the Event
Time fields.
Event Description
(4,000 characters
maximum)
Enter a description of the event. The maximum number of
characters is 4000.
Event Time
Event Date
Select the date of the event from the drop-down list or click
the icon to select a date from the calendar interface.
Event Start Time
Select the time the event will begin from the drop-down list.
Event End Time
Select the time the event will end from the drop-down list.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 119 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CALENDAR QUICK JUMP
Overview
The Calendar Quick Jump page allows users to quickly access a month, week, or day in the
Calendar. Calendar Quick Jump is useful when looking for events planned for months in advance
of the current date.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Quick Jump page.
1.
Click Course Calendar in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Quick Jump from the Calendar page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Calendar Quick Jump page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Calendar Quick Jump
Please select the date
you wish to access.
Use the drop-down arrow to select a calendar date or click
the icon to select a date from the Calendar interface. The
Calendar page will appear with the selected date.
Please choose the
type of view you wish
to access the
specified date.
Select an option to indicate the type of Calendar view:
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
•
Month. Display the month in which the date falls.
•
Week. Display the week in which the date falls.
•
Day. Display that date only.
Page 120 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TASKS
Overview
The Tasks page organizes projects or activities (referred to as tasks) by defining task priority and
tracking task status. A user can create tasks and post them to the Tasks page. Each user can post
personal tasks to their page, Instructors can post tasks to users participating in their courses, and
System Administrators can post tasks to all users’ Tasks pages. Task information is arranged in
columns that display the priority, task name, status, and due date.
Find this page
Click Tasks in Course Tool on the Control Panel to open the Tasks page.
Functions
To use the functions available on the Tasks page, follow the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
view a task and the details of the
task
the task link.
create and post a task
Add Task to access the Create Task page. The
Add Task page will appear.
modify a task
Modify to access the Modify Task page for a
particular task. The Modify Task page will appear.
remove a task
Remove to remove a task. This action is
irreversible.
sort
the link at the top of the Priority, Subject, or Due
Date column.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 121 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD OR MODIFY TASK
Overview
Tasks may be added or modified by accessing the Add Task page or Modify Task page. The fields
on the Add Task page and Modify Task page are the same. The Add Task page opens with empty
fields where as the Modify Task page opens with a task already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Task page or the Modify Task page.
1.
Click Tasks in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Task from the Tasks page. To modify a task, click Modify and the Modify Task
page will appear.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add Task or Modify Task page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Task Information
Task Title
Enter the title of the task.
Description
Enter a description of the task.
Due Date
Select the date the task is due from the drop-down list or click
the icon to select a date from the calendar interface.
Task Options
Priority
Select a priority. The options are:
•
Low (task appears with a blue arrow pointed down)
•
Normal
•
High (task appears with a red arrow pointed up)
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 122 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SEND EMAIL
Overview
Instructors can send email to individuals who participate in the course from the Send Email page.
Emails can be sent to individual users or to groups of users within the course, such as all Teaching
Assistants.
Instructors cannot send email to others via the Internet with the Send Email function.
Find this page
Click Send Email in Course Tools on the Control Panel to open the Send E-mail page.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Send email page:
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
All Users
Sends email to all users in a specified course.
All Students
Sends an email to all Students in the course.
All Groups
Sends email to all of the groups in a specified course.
All Teaching
Assistants
Sends email to all of the Teaching Assistants in the course.
All Instructors
Sends email to all of the Instructors in the course.
All Observers
Sends email to all of the Observers for a specified course
Single / Select
Users
Sends email to a single user or select users in the course.
Single / Select
Groups
Send email to a single group or select groups in the course.
Single / Select
Observers
Send email to a single Observer or select Observers in the
course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 123 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COMPOSE AND SEND AN EMAIL
Overview
Send Email enables users to send email to fellow classmates, Instructors, Teaching Assistants or
Groups within a course.
Note: Recipients of each email will not see the email addresses of other
recipients.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Send Email-Compose Message page.
1.
Click Send Email in Course Tools on the Control Panel.
2.
Click one of the options to select the recipients. The Compose Message page will appear.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Send Email page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Enter Message Details
To
Recipients display in this field. If the email is intended for a
select audience, an interface for selecting users will
appear. The interface will not appear if an email is intended
for all users.
To select user to receive an email, highlight the users in the
Available column and click the arrow to move them to the
Selected column. A back arrow is available to move a user
out of the recipient list.
The interface also includes an Invert button. Click Invert
and highlighted users will no longer be highlighted and
those users that are not selected will be highlighted.
From
The sender's email address will automatically be displayed
in this field.
Subject
Enter the subject of the email.
Message
Enter the body of the email. Remember that a copy of the
message will be also be sent to the sender. Also, a receipt
page will appear after the message is sent listing all the
users that were sent the message. The receipt page does
not confirm that users received the message! It only
confirms that the message was sent.
The email tool can use HTML formatting in email
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 124 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F IELD
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
messages.
Return Receipt
Check this box to receive a copy of this message that
includes a list of recipients. If this box is not checked, the
sender will receive a copy of this message without the list
of recipients.
Add Attachments
Add
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Click here to add attachments. Select Browse and
navigate to the file that should be attached to the email.
After adding one file, the option to attach another file will
appear.
Page 125 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
DIGITAL DROP BOX
Overview
The Digital Drop Box enables Students to exchange files with the Instructor.
Note: A file added to the Drop Box will not appear to the Instructor until
it has been sent. Once a file has been sent to the Instructor, it cannot
be removed from the Drop Box.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Digital Drop Box page.
1.
Open a Course.
2.
Click Control Panel.
3.
Select Digital Drop Box.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Digital Drop box page.
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Add File
Upload files to the Drop Box.
Send File
Send a file to the Instructor.
Remove
Remove a file from the Drop Box.
Time stamps
The following date and time information is included in files:
•
Files sent to the Instructor will show the date and time submitted.
•
Files that are added to the Drop Box but not sent will show the date and time posted.
•
Files sent from the Instructor will show the date and time received.
Note: The date and time displayed in each instance is not the date and
time on the user’s machine, rather, it is the date and time on the
Blackboard Academic Suite server.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 126 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD FILE TO THE DIGITAL DROP BOX
Overview
Files are added to the Digital Drop Box from the Add File page. A file is not automatically sent if it is
placed in the Drop Box through the Add File option. Files must be sent through the Send File
option.
Files that are added to the Drop Box but not sent will show the date and time posted. Once the file
is sent it will show the date and time sent.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add File page.
1.
Open a Course.
2.
Click Control Panel.
3.
Select Digital Drop Box.
4.
Click Add File.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add File page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
File Information
Title
Enter the title of the file.
File
Click Browse to locate a file or enter the exact path.
Comments
Enter any comments related to the file. These comments
will appear beneath the title on the Drop Box page.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 127 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SEND FILE FROM THE DIGITAL DROP BOX
Overview
Users can select a file already in the Digital Drop Box to send. Users may also select a file not in
the Digital Drop Box on the Send File page. A file sent that is not already in the user’s Drop Box is
added to the user’s Drop Box when it is sent.
Files that are added to the Drop Box but not sent will show the date and time posted. Once the file
is sent to it will show the date and time sent.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Send File page.
1.
Open a Course.
2.
Click Control Panel.
3.
Select Digital Drop Box.
4.
Click Send File.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
File Information
Select File
Click the drop-down arrow and select a file to send.
Title
Enter the title of the file.
File
Click Browse to upload a file and send it to the Instructor.
Comments
Enter any comments about the file. These comments will
appear beneath the title.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 128 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
GLOSSARY MANAGER
-Overview
Each course has its own Glossary of terms. Each entry consists of the term and an accompanying
definition. The Glossary must be enabled by the Instructor before Students can view it. To turn on
the Glossary, simply enable it as a Course Tool and then add it to the Course Menu.
The Glossary Manager controls all of the entries in the Course Glossary.
Find this page
Click Glossary Manager from the Control Panel.
Fields
The table below details the functions on the Glossary Manager page.
TO . . .
CLICK
Add a term
Add Term in the action bar. A page will appear with entry fields
to create a term.
Delete a term
Remove. Each term in the Glossary has its own remove link.
Change a term
Modify. Each term in the Glossary has its own modify link.
Upload a file of
terms
Upload Glossary in the action bar.
Download the
Glossary
Download Glossary in the action bar.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 129 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD GLOSSARY TERM
Overview
Glossary terms may be added one-by-one using the Add Glossary Term page. On this page, an
Instructor may add a single term and its associated definition. To load a number of terms at once
into the Glossary, use the Upload Glossary feature.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the Add Glossary Term page:
1.
Click Glossary Manager from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Term from the action bar on the Glossary Manager page.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Glossary Term page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Term
Enter a term to add to the Glossary.
Definition
Enter a definition for the term. Definitions may include simple
HTML to modify text, but more sophisticated HTML formatting
should be avoided. Also, carriage returns are not recognized
when entered in a definition, but HTML code to denote breaks
in text will work.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 130 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
DOWNLOAD GLOSSARY
Overview
Downloading a Glossary creates a comma delimited data file (.CSV) of the Glossary. Each entry is
separated by a hard return and within each entry the term and the definition are separated by a
comma.
Downloading a Glossary is useful for adding terms to another course. The Glossary can be
modified offline and then uploaded to another course.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the Download Glossary page:
1.
Click Glossary Manager from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Download Glossary from the action bar on the Glossary Manager page.
Download a Glossary
To download a Glossary, simply click Download. The Glossary may be edited in a spreadsheet
program such as Excel or in a text editor like Notepad. Please see the next topic, Upload a
Glossary,for details on the formatting of a Glossary file.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 131 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
UPLOAD GLOSSARY
Overview
Uploading a Glossary is a quick method of adding many terms to the Glossary. Uploading a
Glossary can either replace the existing Glossary or supplement it by adding the terms in the file to
the existing Glossary.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the Upload Glossary page:
1.
Click Glossary Manager from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Download Glossary from the action bar on the Glossary Manager page.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Upload Glossary page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Specify Upload File
CSV File
Enter the full path to the Glossary file. The Glossary file must be
a comma delimited data file (.CSV). Alternatively, click Browse
to search your computer's files for a Glossary file.
Upload File Options
Add the items in
the list to the
existing Glossary
Select this option to supplement the existing Glossary with a list
of new terms. If a term appears in both the existing Glossary
and the file, the definition in the file will replace the definition in
the existing Glossary. If the same term appears two or more
times in the file, the last definition for the term will appear in the
Glossary.
Delete all existing
Glossary terms
and replace with
the terms in this
list
Select this option to remove the existing Glossary and replace it
with the terms in the upload file.
Glossary file format
Within the CSV file, each entry is separated by a hard return and the term and the definition are
separated by a comma. For example:
"Apple","A red fruit."
"Onion", "A vegetable."
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 132 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Although it is not always necessary to enclose the term and the definition in quotes, Blackboard
strongly recommends this practice to avoid processing errors.
Example:
"Apple","A delicious fruit, usually <b>red</b> in color. Apples
are grown all over the world and are an important religious and
mythical symbol to several cultures. The Pacific Northwest region
of the United States, particularly Washington state, is famous
for its apples.<br><br> However, most refined apple lovers agree
that the best apples come from the Hudson River valley area of
New York. Perhaps this is why New York City is nicknamed, ""The
Big Apple."""
"Onion","Onions are a tasty vegetable with green stalks and a
white, yellow, or red bulb. For the best-tasting Onions, visit
the \"Onion Capital of the World\" Pine Island, New York."
Quotation marks that appear in a definition or a term must be escaped. This means that the
quotation mark must be identified as part of the definition or the mark will be read as the end of the
definition. Quotation marks may be escaped using a backslash (\") or another set of quotation
marks ("").
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 133 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MESSAGES
Overview
The Messages feature gives each course a private and secure system for communication that
functions similar to email. Keep in mind that Messages cannot be sent or received outside of the
users in the course.
Messages are usually accessed through the Communications area of a course. Although, as with
most features, the Instructor can restrict access or change the layout of the Course Menu so that
Messages are accessible directly. For information about using Messages as a user, please see the
Blackboard Academic Suite User Guide.
Find this page
Messages may be accessed through the Communications area of the Course Menu or Instructors
may access Messages from the Control Panel.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 134 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COLLABORATION TOOLS
Overview
Collaboration Tools allow users and Instructors to engage in synchronous communication.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following topics:
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
Collaboration Tools
Provides an overview of the Virtual Classroom and Chat
features.
Collaboration
Sessions
Explains how instances of each collaboration tool are
organized.
Create/Modify
Collaboration
Session
Gives instructions for building a session.
Virtual Classroom
Provides an overview of the Virtual Classroom.
Menu Bar
Describes the functions available in the Menu Bar of the Virtual
Classroom.
Classroom Tool
Box
Describes the functions available in the Virtual Classroom tool
box.
Whiteboard
Explains the Whiteboard function in the Virtual Classroom.
Group Browser
Describes how to view Web sites as a group during a session.
Content Map
Explains how to access course content from within the Virtual
Classroom.
Ask Question
Describes how users pose a question to the session
moderator.
Question Inbox
Describes how the moderator organizes and answers
questions.
Chat
Explains the Chat tool.
Private Messages
Provides instructions for communicating with one other user in
the chat without sharing the messages with the rest of the
class.
User Information
Describes how to view details about another user in the chat.
Record Menu
Reviews the functions for Recording a session.
Session
Recordings
Explains how users access the Recording of an earlier session.
Recording
Properties
Describes the attributes of a session Recording.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 135 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COLLABORATION TOOLS
Overview
The Collaboration Tools allow users to participate in real-time lessons and discussions. Examples
of these sessions include real-time, online classroom discussions, TA sessions, and live questionand-answer forums. Recording of previous sessions are also available for review. Guest speakers
can also lead sessions using the Collaboration Tools. Users can search for and join Collaboration
Sessions and view session archives.
Collaboration Tools
The following Collaboration Tools are available.
T OOL
D ESCRIPTION
Virtual Classroom
Users engage in a real-time discussion with other users, access
the Web, and engage in question and answer sessions. Users
may also access the Whiteboard to display text and images.
Chat
Chat is part of the Virtual Classroom. It can also be accessed
separately. Chat allows users to open just the chat function.
Java Plug-in
The Java 2 Run Time Environment is required to use the Collaboration Tools. The plug-in may be
downloaded from the page that appears when a user joins a Collaboration Session, or may be
found at http://java.sun.com/products/plugin/index.html. Blackboard recommends using version 1.5
of the Java 2 Runtime Environment, however, the Collaboration Tools will also work with version
1.4.
Take care to uninstall any existing Java plug-ins before installing a new version.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Collaboration Sessions page.
1.
Click Communication on the Course Menu in a Course.
2.
Select Collaboration.
Functions
The following table describes the functions available from this page.
TO . . .
CLICK
filter the sessions
listed on the page
the arrow next to the drop-down list and select the type of
session to display. Click Filter. The filters include:
•
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Show All – The default filter that displays all of the
Page 136 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
TO . . .
Instructor Manual
CLICK
...
Collaboration Sessions.
•
Open Rooms – Displays all of the sessions that are in
use.
•
Rooms with Archives – Displays completed sessions
that have an archive.
•
Rooms Available in the Future – Displays sessions
that are scheduled to take place in the future.
search for a
session
the Session Name, Start Date, or End Date option and then
enter a value in the field. Click Search.
enter a session
Join next to the session.
access the
Recording for a
session
Recording next to the session.
User Roles
There are two roles available for users in Collaboration Sessions: Passive and Active. The Session
Admin controls user access and functionality during a Collaboration session by assigning Passive
or Active roles. For example, Session Admins determine which users can chat, send private
messages, or ask questions during a session by assigning specific Access Rights to the different
roles. The Student icon will appear in the Role column next to those Students who are Active.
Student roles can change throughout the Collaboration Session. Users who are Passive, but would
like Active rights, can signal the Session Admin by clicking the hand icon. The Session Admin then
makes the user Active.
Macintosh and the Collaboration Tool
Macintosh users running OS X and Netscape should run Netscape 7. When opening the
Collaboration Tool, Netscape may put the tool in the background. If this happens, check under the
Window menu for the Collaboration Tool. Netscape 6.2 does not work well with the Collaboration
Tool and should be replaced with Netscape 7. For those users that wish to use Safari, be aware
that Pop-Up Window Blocking must disabled.
Accessible Collaboration Tool
An accessible version of the Collaboration Tool is available.
A link to this version appears when Join is selected on the Collaboration Sessions page. This link
will open the Accessible version of the Collaboration Tool. Links to items that appear in the Virtual
Classroom, such as items in the Course Map and Group Browser, will appear in this version.
Documents created on the Whiteboard may be viewed if the Session Admin takes a snapshot. A
link will be created to the snapshot for users to view.
The sound of a door opening or closing will be audible to all participants when a user enters or
leaves a session through the accessible version.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 137 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COLLABORATION SESSIONS
Overview
The Collaboration Session page is used to manage the Collaboration Tools available in the
Blackboard Learning System. From this page the Instructor can access all of the Collaboration
Sessions for the course, including those that have already taken place and are archived and those
that are scheduled for the future. Instructors can also schedule new Collaboration Sessions and
make changes to those already scheduled from this page.
Find this page
Click Collaboration in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
Default Collaboration Sessions
Each course and organization begins with two default Collaboration Sessions. The Lecture Hall is
the default Virtual Classroom, and Office Hours is the default Lightweight Chat. These default
sessions can be removed. Removing a session is irreversible.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Collaboration Sessions page:
TO . . .
CLICK
...
create a new
Collaboration
Session
Create Collaboration Session. The Create Collaboration
Session page will open.
filter the sessions
listed on the page
the arrow next to the drop-down list and select the type of
session to display. Click Filter. The filters include:
•
Show All – The default filter that displays all of the
Collaboration Sessions.
•
Open Rooms – Displays all of the sessions that are
currently being used.
•
Rooms with Recordings – Displays completed
sessions that have a Recording.
•
Rooms Available in the Future – Displays sessions
that are scheduled to take place in the future.
search for a
session
the Session Name, Start Date or End Date option and then
enter a value in the field. Click Search.
enter a session
Join next to the session. The Virtual Classroom or Chat for that
session will open.
access the
Recordings for a
session
Recordings next to the session. The Session Recordings page
will appear.
change the name,
availability, or tools
Manage next to the session. The Modify Collaboration Session
page will appear.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 138 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
TO . . .
Instructor Manual
CLICK
...
used during the
session
delete a session
Remove next to the session. This action is irreversible.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 139 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CREATE/MODIFY COLLABORATION SESSION
Overview
Instructors create new Collaboration Sessions using the Virtual Classroom or the Chat from the
Create Collaboration Session page. Instructors can schedule sessions for specific dates and times.
The Create Collaboration Session page and Modify Collaboration Session page function in a
similar manner. The Create Collaboration Session page opens with empty fields while the Modify
Collaboration Session page opens with a session already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Create Collaboration Session page or the Modify Collaboration
Session page.
1.
Click Collaboration in Course Tools of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Create Collaboration Session on the Collaboration Sessions page or click Manage
next to a Collaboration Session.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create Collaboration Session page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Name Your Session
Session Name
Enter the name of the new session.
Schedule Availability
Select Dates of
Availability
A Start and End date and time for the Collaboration Session
can be set but is not required. If these are not selected then
the session is always open and available for users.
Available
Select Yes to make the session available.
Collaboration Tools
Choose a
collaboration tool
for this session
Select Virtual Classroom or Chat.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 140 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIRTUAL CLASSROOM
Overview
Users can ask questions, draw on the whiteboard, and participate in breakout sessions from the
Virtual Classroom. The Session Admin establishes which tools in the Virtual Classroom users can
access.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Virtual Classroom.
1.
Click Communication on the Course Menu.
2.
Select Collaboration Tools.
3.
Click Join next to a Virtual Classroom session.
Virtual Classroom areas
The table below details the areas of the Virtual Classroom.
P ART
F UNCTION
Menu Bar
Allows the Session Admin to control the Virtual Classroom.
This includes managing participation, monitoring breakout
sessions, and ending the session.
Classroom Tool
box
Includes all of the tools used during the Virtual Classroom
session. This includes searching for Web sites, asking and
answering questions, utilizing the Whiteboard, and accessing
the Course Map.
Chat
Allows users to compose messages, raise their hands to ask
questions, and activate private messages.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 141 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MENU BAR
Overview
All users have access to the options on the Menu Bar. The functions available in the Menu Bar
include:
•
View - Choose an option for viewing Personal Messages in the Virtual Classroom.
•
Clear - Clear the session display.
•
Breakouts - Create a breakout room for a group of users.
View
Select Show in-line to view private messages within the chat area. Select Show in separate
frame to view private messages in a separate window.
Clear
Clear erases the users chat display.
Breakouts
Select the checkboxes for the users who will participate in the Breakout session. Users may only
join a Breakout session if they are selected by the creator of the Breakout session.
Users who enter a Breakout session are still active in the main Virtual Classroom Session. If a
Breakout session is closed users are still active in the main session. Breakout sessions default to
the same settings as the main session.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 142 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CLASSROOM TOOL BOX
Overview
If granted access to these tools by the Session Admin, users can use the Whiteboard, access Web
sites, and view the course map.
The Classroom Tool box appears on the left side of the Virtual Classroom. To begin using items in
the Tool box click the name of the tool.
Tools
The following tools are available in the Classroom Tool box.
T OOL
D ESCRIPTION
Whiteboard
Enables users to present different types of information as they
would on a blackboard in a classroom.
Group Browser
Enables users to collaboratively browse the Web.
Course Map
Enables users to browse the Course Contents while they are in
a Virtual Classroom.
Ask Question
Enables users to ask questions during the session.
Question Inbox
Enables users to answer questions submitted by other users
during a session.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 143 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
WHITEBOARD
Overview
The Whiteboard enables users in a Virtual Classroom to present different types of information as
they would on a blackboard in a classroom. Using the tools in the Whiteboard Tools palette, users
can draw images, type text, and present equations. The Session Admin determines whether or not
this function is made available to users.
Functions
The table below details the tools available for use on the Whiteboard.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
select an item
the Arrow tool. Then click on an item for selection. The
following may be performed on selected items:
•
Enlarge: Click one of the small black boxes that
surround the item and drag it to the desired size.
•
Move: Click the item and move it to the desired
location.
•
Cut: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the Cut
icon.
•
Copy: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the
Copy icon.
•
Paste: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the
Paste icon.
•
Delete: Click the Whiteboard item. Click on the
selected object. Then click the Delete icon.
•
Group items: Click the Whiteboard items. Then click
the Group icon.
•
Ungroup: Click a Whiteboard item in a group. Then
click the Ungroup icon.
•
Bring front: Click the Whiteboard item. Click on
selected object. Then click the Bring to front icon.
•
Bring back: Click the Whiteboard item. Click on
selected object. Then click the Send to back icon.
•
Select all figures on the Whiteboard: Click the
Selects all Figures icon.
draw free hand
the Pen tool. Choose the color of the pen in the Fill Color
drop-down list.
enter text using the
keyboard
the text tool (T) then the Whiteboard area. A Whiteboard
Text Input box appears. Type the text in the box and click
Insert. Use the options in the Tools palette to select color,
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 144 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
TO . . .
Instructor Manual
CLICK
...
font, and size.
draw a straight line
the Slanted Line tool.
highlight something
with an arrow
the Pointer.
draw a square
the Square tool. Choose the color of the square from the
Fill Color drop-down list.
draw a circle
the Oval tool. Choose the color of the circle from the Fill
Color drop-down list.
input an equation
The Math and Science Equation Editor icon (∑). The
Equation Editor will appear. Input the equation and click
Insert Equation.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 145 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
GROUP BROWSER
Overview
The Group Browser enables users to collaboratively browse the Web. This tool opens a URL that is
viewable by all users. URLs used in the session will be recorded in the Recording if one is created.
The Session Admin will determine whether or not this function is made available to users.
Functions
The table below details the available functions in the Group Browser.
TO . . .
CLICK
open a Web site
type the URL in the Enter Address field.
choose where to
display the Web
site
Display To Class to display the window in the Whiteboard or
click Preview in New Window to open the Web site in a new
browser window. The preview window will only be displayed to
the user that opened it.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 146 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CONTENT MAP
Overview
The Content Map enables users to browse the course while in a Virtual Classroom. By default, the
Session Admin has access to operate the Content Map. Users must have Active privileges to use
the Content Map in a Virtual Classroom.
Functions
The table below details the available functions in the Content Map.
TO . . .
CLICK
display an element
on the map to all
users
the course area in the Content Map and select Display To
Class in the drop-down list.
display an element
on the map in a
separate window
the course area in the Content Map and select Preview in New
Window in the drop-down list. The new window is only visible
to the User who opens it.
refresh the Content
Map during a
Collaboration
Session
Refresh Tree in the drop-down list. This will update the
Content Map to match the Course Menu.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 147 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ASK QUESTION
Overview
Users are able to ask questions during the session. As users submit questions during the session
the Session Admin can view and respond to them.
Note: Only users who have an Active role can ask questions.
Ask a Question
To ask a question, select Compose in the Ask Question area. Enter the question in the text box
and click Send.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 148 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
QUESTION INBOX
Overview
Questions from users are sent to the Question Inbox during the Virtual Classroom session. The
Question Inbox is used to manage and respond to questions during a Collaboration Session.
Function
The table below details the functions available in the Question Inbox Tool.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
respond to a
question
the Username in the From list and click the Respond to
Question icon. The Respond to Question pop-up window will
appear.
delete a question
the Username in the From list and click the Delete icon.
view only
questions that
have not been
answered
the checkbox next to Show unanswered only.
Respond to Question fields
The table below details the fields on the Respond to Question pop-up window.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Question
Question that was submitted.
Response
Enter the response to the question.
Private
Select this check box to make the response to the question
private. If marked private, the response will only be sent to the
person who submitted the message.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 149 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CHAT
Overview
The Chat allows the users to interact with each other via a text-based chat. Chat is part of the
Virtual Classroom. It can also be accessed separately.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open a Chat:
1.
Click Communication on the Course Menu.
2.
Select Collaboration Tools.
3.
Click Join to next to a Chat session.
Functions
The table below details the functions available in the Chat.
TO . . .
THEN
enter a message
for the class to
read
type the message in the Compose field. Click Send. The
message will appear in the chat area. There 1000 character
limit for chat messages.
become an Active
user
click the hand symbol. A hand appears next to the Username.
The Session Admin clicks on the hand to make the user Active.
view user
information
Select a Username in the Participant list and then click User
Info.
send a private
message to a user
Select a Username in the Participant list and then click Private
Message.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 150 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
PRIVATE MESSAGES
Overview
Users can send private messages to each other if the Session Admin enables this tool in the
Session Controls. Private messages are not recorded or archived.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 151 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
USER INFORMATION
Overview
The User Information pop-up window displays personal information about a user such as name,
email address, and any other information the user has chosen to add to their profile.
Click User Info in the Chat area and the User Information pop-up window will appear.
Send a Private Message
Click Private Message to send a message to the user. The Compose Private Message pop-up
window will appear.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 152 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
RECORD MENU
Overview
Virtual Classroom and Chat sessions can be recorded and archived. Recordings can be started
and stopped, as well as paused and un-paused by the Instructor during the session. A session can
have more then one Recording. If the Instructor selects End to stop a session then the recorder will
automatically stop recording the session.
Record menu
The table below details the buttons that appear on the Record menu.
B UTTON
D ESCRIPTION
Start
Click Start to begin recording a session. The user will be
prompted to name the Recording.
Pause
Click Pause to pause a Recording once it has started. Click this
button again to u-pause the Recording and begin recording
again. Pause and un-pause will be marked and timestamped in
the Recording.
Stop
Click Stop to end recording the session. When Stop is selected
the Recording is completed and a stop marker and time/date
stamp will be included at the end of the Recording.
Bookmark
Click Bookmark to insert a bookmark anywhere in the
Recording of the session.
Recording the Whiteboard
The Snapshoot button in the Whiteboard Tool bar is used to record the Whiteboard in the
Recording. The Instructor clicks the Snapshot button to record an image of the Whiteboard. The
image of the Whiteboard in the Recording corresponds with when it was recorded. The Snapshot
button cannot be activated unless the session is being recorded.
Session Recordings
The Instructor must make a Recording available before Students can view it. For more information
see Recording Properties.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 153 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SESSION RECORDINGS
Introduction
Session Recordings allow users to review Collaboration Sessions. Sessions are archived by date.
Sessions will not appear until the leader of the session has stopped recording.
Note: If an Instructor does not stop the Recording and exit the
Collaboration Session, the Recording will not end and no information
will be recorded in the Recording Duration column. Only when the
leader stops recording or ends the session will the Recording stop and
the duration display.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to access the Session Recordings page.
1.
Open Collaboration in Course Tools on the Control Panel
2.
Click Recordings for a session.
Functions
The table below describes the functions available on this page.
TO . . .
CLICK
search for a
Recording in the
Collaboration
Session
the Recording Name or Creation Date option in the Search by
field. Enter the name of the Recording or the date it was
created in the field and click Search.
open a Recording
the Recording under the Recording name column.
change the name
or availability of a
Recording
Manage. The Recording Properties page will appear.
remove a
Recording
Remove. This action is irreversible.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 154 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
RECORDING PROPERTIES
Introduction
The Recording Properties page allows the Instructor to change the name and availability of a
Recording Session.
Note: Recordings are available to Students by default
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Recording Properties page.
1.
Click Collaboration in the Course Tools section of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Recordings for a session.
3.
Click Manage for a Recording.
Fields
The table below describes the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Edit Recording Name
Recording Name
Enter or modify the name of the Recording.
Availability to Students
Available
Select Yes and Students will be able to view this Recording.
Select No and this Recording will be unavailable to Students.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 155 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
DISCUSSION BOARD
Overview
This chapter reviews the Discussion Board feature.
In this chapter
This chapter includes the following topics.
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
About the Discussion Board
Provides a general overview of the Discussion Board.
View and Organize
Discussion Board
Content Explains how to open a forum and view the
posts.
Initiate a Thread
Describes how to start a conversation in a forum.
Respond to a Discussion
Board Post
Explains the different methods for posting a reaction to
a message.
Grading Discussion Board
Participation
Provides steps for assigning a grade to a Student for
Discussion Board participation.
Peer Review Through the
Discussion Board
Provides an example of how to use the Discussion
Board for users to respond to the work of other users.
Keeping the Discussion
Board Content Safe
Gives details on the security options for ensuring safe
content.
Delegating Discussion
Board Administration
Explains how to assign administrative roles within the
Discussion Board to other users.
Incorporating Discussion
Board Forums into the
Learning Process
Describes how Discussion Boards work within a
course.
Discussion Board Statistics
Explains how to access statistics on usage.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 156 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ABOUT THE DISCUSSION BOARD
Overview
The Discussion Board is an outcomes based learning tool that can be applied in a number of ways
to enhance learning and measure performance.
Discussion Board Terms
The table below outlines the terms used to describe Discussion Board features.
T ERM
D EFINITION
Thread
The initial post and the entire series of replies to that
post within a Disucssion Board forum.
Thread Detail
The page that displays the threaded view of all posts in
a thread along with the selected post.
Post
A Discussion Board entry posted to a thread or used to
start a thread. Also used as a verb to refer to the act of
submitting a post.
Forum Role
A role type that is assigned to all members of the
Discussion Board for each forum and enables specific
privileges within the forum. A user may have one role
per forum, however, a user’s role in each forum may
differ.
Blocked
A forum role that blocks the user from accessing the
forum.
Reader
A forum role that grants the user the rights to read the
contents of a forum. Users with this role may only view
content and cannot add or respond to posts.
Participant
A forum role that grants the user read and write
privileges in the forum.
Grader
A forum role that grants the user Participant privileges
as well as the Grading privileges for the forum.
Moderator
A forum role that grants Participant privileges as well
as the ability to modify, delete, and lock posts. If a
Moderation Queue is used, the Moderator may also
approve or reject posts in the queue.
Manager
A forum role that grants all privileges.
Grade Forum
The process of assigning a grade to a user for their
performance in a forum.
Grade Thread
The process of assigning a grade to a user for their
performance in a thread.
Rate Post
The process of evaluating a post based on a fixed, 5
point scale.
Collect Posts
The process of selecting one or more posts or threads
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 157 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
T ERM
Instructor Manual
D EFINITION
for inclusion in on a page that can be sorted, filtered,
printed, and saved as a document. The collection is
gathered into a format that can be sorted, filtered,
printed, and saved as a document that can be viewed
in a browser.
Flag
A mark used to call attention to the post.
Copy Forum
The process of creating a clone of a forum or the forum
settings in the same discussion board or in another
discussion board in the same course or organization.
Save Posts
The act of saving a post as a draft.
Published Post
A post that has been submitted and, if necessary,
approved by a moderator.
Post Position
The position of a post in a thread relative to the other
posts.
Draft
A post that has been saved for future editing.
Locked Thread
A thread that is visible for reading but cannot be
modified. Users may not post to a locked thread.
Unavailable Thread
A thread that is hidden and inaccessible to all users
except forum Managers.
Hidden Thread
A Thread that is locked and not visible by default.
Users may view hidden threads by enabling the
Display Hidden Threads feature.
Moderation Queue
A list of posts that must be approved before they will
appear in the Discussion Board.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 158 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIEW AND ORGANIZE DISCUSSION BOARD CONTENT
Overview
Forums can appear throughout a course, in any area where an Instructor chooses. Each group
may also have a private Discussion Board with forums available only to those users that are a part
of the group. All forums that are not a part of a group are accessible from various points in the
course or by going to the Discussion Board tool. The Discussion Board tool centralizes all of the
forums in the course.
Please keep in mind that when users open the Discussion Board tool they will only see those
forums they can access.
Search
A search function appears at the top of the page throughout the Discussion Board. The search
includes a keyword field, date restrictions, and options for where to search. The search function
starts at the current level and options exist to work up. For example, in a thread, the default search
option only searches that thread but options exist to search the entire forum or all forums From the
search function, users can search all forums in the course, including any forums that appear in the
user’s groups.
Thread Status
The Forum Manager can change the status of a thread to one of the following:
•
Published: A published thread is available to users.
•
Locked: Users may read the thread but not make any additions or modifications.
Locking a thread allows Grades to be assigned without users updating or
changing posts.
•
Unlocked: Unlocking a thread allows users to modify and add to the thread.
•
Hidden: Hidden threads do not display unless the user chooses. Hidden threads
may not be modified. Hidden threads may not be modified. Hiding threads
removes outdated threads and makes relevant content easier to find.
•
Unavailable: Unavailable threads are only visible to forum managers. Even then,
forum managers must choose to view these threads. Making threads unavailable
means that users can no longer view the thread.
Follow these steps to change the status of a thread:
1.
Open a forum in the Discussion Board.
2.
Select threads.
3.
4.
Choose a new status for the selected threads using the Change Status to: dropdown list.
Click Go.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 159 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Forum View
The forum view lists the threads in the forum and includes several options for displaying and
managing threads. The list of threads can be sorted by clicking the carat at the top of each column.
Posts within the thread are viewed by clicking on the hyperlinked name of the thread in the Thread
column.
The functions at the top of the page include a Display option to show threads of different status and
a search function. There is also an action bar that includes the following functions:
F UNCTION
P URPOSE
Add Thread
Initiate a new thread.
Remove Thread
Remove the selected threads from the forum.
Deleted threads cannot be restored. Use the
unavailable function to completely hide threads
from users without actually deleting the
threads.
Collect
Gather selected threads onto one page where
posts can be sorted, filtered, or printed.
Grade Forum
This option only appears if grading is turned on
for the forum.
Change Status to:
Update the availability status of the selected
threads.
Thread View
Clicking on a thread in a forum brings up the Thread Detail The thread view is divided into three
parts. Post viewing and management functions appear at the top of the page. The middle of the
page displays a list of posts, with replies nested underneath the original post. The bottom of the
page displays the current post.
The following options are available when viewing a thread:
F EATURE
D ESCRIPTION
Action Bar
Collect
Group posts into an organized filterable and sortable set.
Flag
Mark a post for later attention.
Unflag
Remove a flag applied to a post.
Grade Thread
Enter a Grade for a user based on their performance in
the Thread. This option only appears if the thread is
graded.
Message List
Select Threads
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Select each thread using the checkboxes or the select all
unselect all options. Selected Threads are included in
Action Bar operations.
Page 160 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F EATURE
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
Current Post
Subscribe
Receive an email alert when a post is updated or a user
posts a reply.
Reply
Generate a response to a post.
Modify
Change the content of the post.
Remove
Remove the post. Removing a post also removes all the
replies to that post.
Rate this Post
Select a score for the post on a 1 to 5 scale.
Previous Post/Next
Post
Click these options to navigate through the posts in the
thread.
Collections
Collections gather posts into a printable, sortable format. Collections are a good way to organize
posts for quick reading. Instructors can create displays of good posts by gathering them as a
collection, printing to PDF or saving as HTML, and then loading the file into the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 161 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
INITIATE A THREAD
Overview
Threads are a series of posts related to a similar topic. When creating a forum, the Instructor has
the option of allowing or not allowing users to start threads. If threads are graded, users cannot
start threads. Generally, the purpose of the forum will dictate whether or not users can start
threads. A moderated, graded forum used to evaluate student performance will usually be tightly
controlled. In this case, it would not be appropriate to allow users to create threads. Other forums
are designed for users to share opinions and thoughts on tangential or unrelated topics. In this
case, it is safe to allow users to create threads and spark discussions.
Start a Thread
Follow these steps to start a thread.
1.
Open a Discussion Board Forum.
2.
Click Add Thread in the action bar. The Add Thread page will appear.
3.
Enter a Subject and a Message. It is also possible to attach files to the post.
4.
Click Save to store a draft of the post or click Submit to create the thread.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 162 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
RESPOND TO A DISCUSSION BOARD POST
Overview
Threads grow as users respond to the initial, and subsequent, posts. Replies build on one another
to construct a conversation.
Reply to a Post
Follow these steps to reply to a post.
1.
Open a thread in a forum.
2.
Find a post.
3.
Click Reply for that post.
4.
Enter a Subject and a Message. It is also possible to attach files to the post. Only
one file can be added using the Attachment function below the text box. When using
the Visual Text Box Editor, multiple files may be added.
5.
Click Save to store a draft of the post or click Submit to create the thread.
6.
The post will appear in the thread underneath the original post.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 163 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
GRADING DISCUSSION BOARD PARTICIPATION
Overview
In a classroom setting, students are often expected to participate in class discussions and that
participation is part of the equation when assessing performance. Within a classroom, participation
performance can be ambiguous. It is sometimes difficult to differentiate the student who is active
but does not advance the discussion from the student that speaks less frequently but with greater
impact.
Student interactions with the Discussion Board are a permanent record of participation. The
Instructor has the option to grade Students at the forum level or at the thread level. In this way the
Instructor can accurately compare Student participation to the expectations set forth.
Enable Grading
Grading options are enabled when the forum is created or by modifying the forum. Click Modify on
the Discussion Board for a forum to change its settings.
The Grade settings appear at the bottom of the Add Forum Page and the Modify Forum page.
Select Grade Forum and enter a point value to evaluate participants on performance throughout
the forum. Select Grade Threads to evaluate participants on performance in each thread. When
the Grade Threads option is used, a Points Possible option appears each time a thread is
started. Keep in mind that users cannot create new threads if Grade Threads is selected for the
forum.
Grade User Participation in a Forum
Follow these steps to evaluate performance in a forum.
1.
Open the Discussion Board. A list of forums will appear. For each forum that may be
graded, an icon will appear in the Grade column.
2.
Click the icon in the Grade column. Only users with a forum role of Grader or Manager
may enter a grade for a forum. A Grader may not view their own work.
3.
A list of users will appear. Click Grade for a user.
4.
A collection of the user’s posts in the forum will appear. Evaluate the posts and assign a
Grade.
5.
Click Submit to add the grade to the Gradebook.
Grade User Participation in a Thread
Follow these steps to evaluate performance within a thread.
1.
Open a Discussion Board and then open a forum and select a thread.
2.
Click Grade Thread. This button will only appear to users with a forum role of Grader or
Manager.
3.
A list of users will appear. Click Grade for a user.
4.
A collection of the user’s posts in the Thread will appear. Evaluate the posts and assign a
Grade. Click Submit to add the grade to the Gradebook.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 164 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Disable Grading for a Forum or Thread
Use the Modify Forum feature to change the grading option to select No Grading. If Grades have
already been entered for the forum or its threads, a warning message will appear that changing the
setting will remove the associated Gradebook Items. Click OK to continue or click Cancel to
preserve the Gradebook Items.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 165 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
PEER REVIEW THROUGH THE DISCUSSION BOARD
Overview
A common learning tool in classrooms is providing feedback to other students on their work.
Students prepare an essay, lab report, or presentation and share it with the class. Other students
are asked to comment on the work and offer criticisms for improvement. This process helps the
student improve their assignment, but is even more valuable to the students that review the work.
Reviewing the work of another student enforces classroom learning and helps the reviewer practice
important communication skills.
The Discussion Board is the perfect place in a course for peer review. Each student may start a
thread and include their work in the initial post. Other students then review the work, assign a rating
to the initial post, and include comments in a response. As users respond, the feedback expands
as users reinforce and build on points made by other students.
Users can respond to a post using a 5-star rating system. To enable this feature, select Allow
members to rate posts when creating the forum.
Rating a Discussion Board Post
Open a thread and view the posts. Each post has an Overall Rating field with five stars. The stars
show the overall rating that the post has received from users. Click on the Rate this Post drop
down list and select a rating from 0 to 5 stars. Your rating is now included in the Overall Rating
and your individual rating appears in the Rate this Post field. A user may not rate the same post
more than once..
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 166 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
KEEPING THE DISCUSSION BOARD CONTENT SAFE
Overview
Discussion Boards give students the freedom to share their thoughts and opinions on class topics
with other users. Occasionally, students may introduce material to the Discussion Board that is
inappropriate for the class discussion. Depending on the maturity and the sensitivity of the students
in the course, it may be important to review student posts for inappropriate content before sharing
posts with the rest of the class.
Instructors can assign Discussion Board users to act as moderators. Moderators review posts
before they are added to a thread and displayed to the class. The Moderator may be the Instructor
or other responsible participants.
It is also possible to prevent an individual user from posting at all. Assigning a user the role of
Blocked will prevent the user from accessing the forum. Assigning an individual user the role of
Reader will allow the user to view content in the Discussion Board but prevent the user from
posting content.
Security Settings
The following settings are available when creating a Discussion Board to ensure that content is
appropriate.
S ETTING
D ESCRIPTION
Allow anonymous posts
If this feature is turned off users are identified by
their username whenever they post a reply. Making
members accountable for the content that they post
is a deterrent for users that wish to post
inappropriate content.
Be careful when disabling this feature as there are
instances where learning can benefit from
anonymous posts, particularly when discussing
sensitive topics If this feature is enabled, the forum
cannot be graded.
Allow authors to remove
own posts and Allow author
to modify own published
posts
Members are deterred from posting inappropriate
content if they do not have control of the content
once it is posted.
Allow members to create
new threads
Preventing members from starting threads helps
focus their posts on the topic.
Force moderation of posts
Moderating posts requires that all posts are
reviewed by a responsible party before the content
is shared with the class.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 167 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Moderate a Forum
Set up a moderator on the Manage Forum Users page. Otherwise, the forum manager must take
responsibility for approving posts.
Follow these steps to moderate forum posts.
Open the forum.
1.
Click Moderate Forum. The Moderate Forum button will only appear in the action bar if
you have a forum role of Manager or Moderator.
2.
The Moderation Queue will appear with a list of posts that are awaiting approval. The
posts appear in chronological order. Those at the top have been in the queue for longer
than those at the bottom.
3.
Click Moderate for a post. The Moderate Post page will appear displaying the message.
4.
Select Publish or Return. If returning the post, add a message to the author explaining
why the post is being returned and some suggestions for modifying the post so it is
appropriate for the discussion.
5.
Click Submit. If the post is approved it will now be shown in the forum. If the post is not
approved, it will only appear to the author and the Moderator in the forum. The post will be
marked returned and the Moderator comments when returning the post will appear as a
reply.
Prevent a User from Posting
There may be an instance where a user should not be allowed to post at all because of past history
of inappropriate posts or if the user has not been participating in discussions throughout the term.
Assign a user the forum role of Reader if the user is allowed to view the forum but not add content.
Assign a user the forum role of Blocked to prevent the user from accessing the forum.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 168 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
DELEGATING DISCUSSION BOARD ADMINISTRATION
Overview
Discussion Boards can serve several different purposes in a course. In many cases, the Instructor
does not wish to be actively involved in the Discussion Board and would like to pass off some or all
of the administration of the Discussion Board to another responsible user. Discussion Board forums
include roles for each user involved in the forum. These roles define privileges within the forum.
The forum roles with administrative roles that can be assigned to users in a forum are:
•
Manager
•
Moderator
•
Grader
Manager
Managers have full control over the forum. Managers can change the forum settings, moderate
posts, and assign grades. The role of Manager should only be assigned to the course Instructor or
someone with similar responsibilities. Users with a course role of Instructor or Teaching Assistant
are granted this forum role by default.
Moderator
Moderators review posts before they are made available to all users in the course. Moderators may
also delete and modify all posts in any forum, even if the forum does not use the Moderation
Queue. Make sure that Moderators are responsible and understand the criteria for appropriate
posts. Users with a course role of Course Builder are granted this forum role by default.
Grader
Graders review Discussion Board posts and enter grades in the Gradebook. The Grader role has
some access to the Gradebook and should only be assigned to users responsible for guiding and
evaluating learning such as Instructors and Teaching Assistants. Graders do not have access to
the Control Panel as part of their forum privileges. Users with a course role of Grader are granted
this forum role by default.
Define a User’s Role in a Forum
Follow these steps to assign a user a role in a forum.
1.
Open the Discussion Board.
2.
Click Manage for a forum.
3.
The Manage Forum Users page will appear.
4.
Select a role for users from the drop-down list. The default value is Participant.
Participants can read and post but have no administrative privileges.
5.
Click OK. The forum roles are now assigned.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 169 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
INCORPORATING DISCUSSION BOARD FORUMS INTO THE LEARNING PROCESS
Overview
Discussion Board forums can be accessed from the Discussion Board tool that lists all the forums
in the course. This centralized view is an easy access point, but there are other ways to access
Discussion Board forums that immerse the user in the learning experience. For example,
Discussion Board forums can be placed in any content area. Thus, a Discussion Board forum may
appear following lecture notes on the same topic. Further, using adaptive release or date
availability restrictions, the forum may only appear after users complete the lesson or after the
Instructor has delivered the lecture in class.
Add a Discussion Board forum to a Content Area
Follow these steps to add a forum within a content area.
1.
Open the Control Panel and navigate to the Content Area and folder where the forum will
appear.
2.
On the right side of the action bar, select Discussion Board from the Select drop-down
list. Click Go.
3.
Choose Select a Discussion Board Forum and select a forum from the list. Click Next.
Note that the Discussion Board page option will link to the Discussion Board Page and
show all the forums in the course. Click create new forum to build a new forum. The
forum will not appear in the desired content area after creation. Navigate back to the
content area and use the Select a Discussion Board Forum option to place the new
forum in the correct location.
4.
Add information about the link on the next page. This determines how the link to the forum
will appear in the content area. Click Submit.
Define Requirements for Viewing the Discussion Board forum
Discussion Board links are subject to date restrictions and adaptive release restrictions. When
restrictions are in place users cannot access the forum from within the content area or from within
the Discussion Board tool. The Instructor always has access to every forum through the Control
Panel.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 170 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
DISCUSSION BOARD STATISTICS
Overview
The Performance Dashboard keeps track of user activity throughout the course, including the
Discussion Board. This information can help Instructors quickly identify Students that are outside
the normal range of participation. Instructor can use this information to reward achievement and
assist students that are struggling with the material.
View Discussion Board Statistics
Follow these steps to view Discussion Board statistics for a user.
1.
Click Performance Dashboard on the Control Panel.
2.
The number of forums where a user has posted appears as a link in the Discussion
Board column. Click the link to view details.
3.
A page appears that lists the following information:
•
Total Posts
•
Date of Last Post
•
Average Post Length (number of characters)
•
Minimum Post Length (number of characters)
•
Maximum Post Length (number of characters)
•
Average Post Position
•
Grade (if the post is not yet graded, the instructor may click a link to the Gradebook
to add a grade)
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 171 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE OPTIONS
Overview
Use the Course Options area to manage the availability and accessibility of a course as well as
manage the appearance of course features. Course Options also includes tools to archive or
recycle the course, and import content.
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Manage Course
Menu
Select which course areas will appear in the Course Menu.
Manage Course
Design
Create a design for the Course Menu and Course Banner.
Manage Tools
Enable Blackboard Learning System, Building Block, and
Content tools.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 172 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANAGE COURSE MENU
Overview
Add and modify course areas from the Manage Course Menu page. For example, choose areas for
Staff Information, specific content, and Course Links.
Course areas may include:
•
folders that hold content such as files, Learning Units, Assessments, and Assignments.
•
specific items such as a course syllabus.
•
External Links, which link to URLs outside of the course.
•
Course Links, which link to other areas within the course.
•
Instructors have the option to include up to 10 different areas for each course.
Note: Administrators may restrict options to maintain a consistent
appearance for all Courses. This may include making some areas
unavailable or setting permanent area names.
Find this page
Click Manage Course Menu from the Control Panel to open the Manage Course Menu page.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
TO . . .
CLICK
add a Course area
Add Course area. The Add New Area: Course area page will
appear.
add a Tool area
Add Tool Area. The Add New Area: Tool Area will appear.
add an External
Link
Add External Link. The Add New Area: External Link page will
appear.
add a Course Link
Add Course Link. The Add New Area: Course Link page will
appear.
modify an area
Modify.
remove an area
Remove. This action is irreversible.
order course areas
the drop-down arrow and select a number. Course areas will
appear in the Course Menu in the order selected.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 173 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD NEW CONTENT AREA
Overview
The Add New Content Area page enables the Instructor to add a new Course area to the Course
and choose which Course Roles will have access to the content.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add New Content Area page.
1.
Click Manage Course Menu from the Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Content Area.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Area Properties
Area Type
Indicates that this is a Course area.
Area name [r]
Select a name for the area from the drop-down list or create a
new name in the space below.
Allow guest
access
Select the check box to make this area available to Guests in
the course.
Allow observer
access
Select the check box to make this area available to Observers
in the course.
Make available
for Student/
Participant users
Select the check box to make this area available to users
enrolled in the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 174 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD NEW TOOL AREA
Overview
The Add New Tool Area page enables the Instructor to add Tools to the Course Menu and choose
which users will have access.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add New Tool Area page.
1.
Click Manage Course Menu under Course Options in the Control Panel
2.
Click Add Tool Area.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Area Properties
Area Type
Select a Tool to add to the Course Menu.
Area name [r]
Enter a name for the Tool. The name entered will appear on the
Course Menu.
Make available
for Student/
Participant users
Select the check box to make this area available to users
enrolled in the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 175 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD NEW COURSE LINK
Overview
Add a link to another part of the course to the Course Menu.
Instructors may add a link to an Assignment or an Assessment that is due. The item would then be
listed in a Course area and also on the Course Menu.
A link to the Discussion Board could be added to the Course Menu.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Course Link page.
1.
Click Manage Course Menu under Course Options in the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Course Link.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Area Properties
Area Type
Indicates that this is a Course Link area.
Area name [r]
Enter a name for the area.
Link location
Click Browse. The Course Map will appear. Select a folder or
item within the Course Map to link to and click Submit.
Allow quest
access
Select the check box to make this area available to guests who
view the course.
Allow observer
access
Select the check box to make this area available to observers
who view the course.
Make available
for Student/
Participant users
Select the check box to make this area available to users
enrolled in the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 176 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD EXTERNAL LINK
Overview
Add an External Link to the Course Menu. When users select this area in the Course Menu they
will automatically be taken to the URL linked to this area.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add External Link page.
1.
Click Manage Course Menu under Course Options in the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add External Link.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Area Properties
Area Type
Indicates that this is an External Link area.
Area name [r]
Enter a name for the area.
Target [r]
Enter a Web site address for the link to access. When adding a
URL, do so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com
Launch in a new
window
Select the check box to open the URL in a new window when it
is accessed by a user.
Allow quest
access
Select the check box to make this area available to guests who
view the course.
Allow observer
access
Select the check box to make this area available to observers
who view the course.
Make available
for Student/
Participant users
Select the check box to make this area available to users
enrolled in the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 177 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE DESIGN
Overview
Instructors manage the appearance of the Course Menu from the Course Design page. They can
choose to use buttons or text links and select colors and design features.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Design page.
1.
Click Course Design under Course Options.
2.
Click Course Design.
Select new style
Select Buttons to make the items in the Course Menu appear as buttons. Select Text Navigation
to make the items in the Course Menu appear as text links.
Button Style Options
Define the following options after choosing the Button Navigation Style.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Style Properties
Button Type
Choose the Button Type from the drop-down list.
Button Shape
Click an option to choose the button shape.
Button Style
Use the drop-down list to select the color of the buttons.
Select Text Style Options
Define the following options after choosing the Text Navigation Style.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Style Properties
Select
background color
for navigation
Click Pick and select a background color for the Course Menu.
Select a highlight
color for the
navigation
Click Pick and select a color for the text in the Course Menu.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 178 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE BANNER
Overview
Instructors can add a banner to the top of the Announcements area on the Course from the Course
Banner page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Banner page.
1.
Click Course Design in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Banner.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Course Banner
Current Banner
Displays the banner that currently appears at the top of the
Announcements area.
New Banner
Enter the path to the new banner file or click Browse to
upload a new course banner.
Remove this banner
Select this check box to remove the banner image from the
Course.
MANAGE TOOLS
Overview
Instructors can control the availability of Tools through Manage Tools Instructors can enable tools
for use during a course and also decide which tools Guests and Observers may access.
Find this page
Click Manage Tools in the Course Options area on the Control Panel to open the Manage Tools
page.
Functions
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 179 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
The table below details the functions available on this page.
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Enable Blackboard
Tools
Select the Blackboard Tools that will be available in the course.
Enable Extension
Tools
Select Building Blocks that will be available in the course.
Enable Content
Tools
Select Content Tools that will be available in the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 180 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ENABLE BLACKBOARD TOOLS
Overview
Course Tools appear directly on the Course Menu of the Courses tab or within areas of the Course
Menu (such as under Tools). Instructors can manage the availability of all of these Tools, such as
Collaboration Tools, the Drop Box, and Email through the Enable Blackboard Tools page.
Instructors can also choose which tools will be available for Guests and Observers to view.
Note: Instructors may add Tools to the Course Menu from the Manage
Course Menu page. The Enable Blackboard Tools page makes Tools
available for use within a course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to access the Enable Blackboard Tools page.
1.
Click Manage Tools in the Course Options area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Enable Blackboard Tools.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Available
Check this box next to those tools that will be used in the
course.
Allow Guest
Check this box next to those tools that Guests are allowed to
view. If a tool is marked with N/A then Guests cannot view it.
Allow Observer
Check this box next to those tools that Observers are allowed
to view. If a tool is marked with N/A then Observers cannot
view it.
Disabling Announcements
If the Instructor disables the Announcements Tool and resets the Course Entry Point to an area
other than Announcements, course Announcements will still be available to Students from the My
Institution tab. Remove each announcement or make them unavailable to prevent users from
viewing them.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 181 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ENABLE BUILDING BLOCKS TOOLS
Overview
Building Blocks are tools added to the Blackboard Learning System. Enable Extension Tools
allows the Instructor to manage all the outside tools that the System Administrator has made
available.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to access the Enable Extension Tools page.
1.
Click Manage Tools in the Course Options area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Enable Extension Tools.
Note: Blocks are not available with Blackboard Learning System - Basic Edition.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Enabled
Select the check box next to those tools that will be used in the
course.
Allow Guest
Select the check box next to those tools that Guests are
allowed to view. If a tool is marked with N/A then Guests cannot
view it.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 182 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ENABLE CONTENT TYPES
Overview
A Content Type is a new format for content that can be added to a course.. On this page, the
Instructor may choose which types of content may be included in the course. Content Types that
are enabled can be added throughout the course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Enable Content Tools page.
1.
Click Manage Tools in the Course Options area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Enable Content Tools.
Enable Content Tools
Check the Enabled box next to those tools that will be used in the course. If the tool is not checked
then it will not be available.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 183 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE SETTINGS
Overview
Course Settings, such as availability, access and enrollment are also managed on the Course
Options area of the Control Panel.
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Course Name and
Description
Modify the name and description of the course.
Course Availability
Select the availability of a course.
Course Duration
Determine the length of the course.
Enrollment
Determine how users will enroll in the course.
Guest and
Observer Access
Chooses whether or not this course is available to guests and
observers.
Categorize Course
Add the course to a category in the Course Catalog.
Course Entry Point
Select an entry point for the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 184 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE NAME AND DESCRIPTION
Overview
Instructors change the name, description, and subject type of a course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Name and Description page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Name and Description.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Name and Description page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Course Title/Description
Course Name
Enter the name of the course. This name will appear as the
course name throughout the Blackboard Academic Suite.
Description
Enter a description of the course.
Course Categorization
Subject Area
Select the subject area that best describes the course.
Discipline
The subject area can be further defined by discipline.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 185 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE AVAILABILITY
Overview
The Course Availability page controlls access to the course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Availability page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Availability.
Course role availability
Select either Yes or No to make the course available to users. If the course is set to available, all
users participating in the course will have access. If the course is set to unavailable, access is
determined by course role.
Note: Courses that are unavailable will not appear in the Course
Catalog.
Fields
The following table describes what type of access different user roles have to a course that is
unavailable:
C OURSE R OLE
A CCESS
Students
The course is not available to Students.
Instructors, Course
Builders, Teaching
Assistants, and
Graders
Courses set to Unavailable will appear to the user. The course
will be indicated as unavailable, but will still be accessible.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WHEN COURSE IS UNAV AILABLE
Page 186 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
GUEST ACCESS
Overview
The Guest Access page is used to control whether or not Guests, those users not participating in
the course, have access to the course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Guest Access page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Guest Access.
Guest Access
Select either Yes or No to make the course available for Guests to view.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 187 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
OBSERVER ACCESS
Overview
Instructors decide if Observers have access to the course. A person with an Observer role is
assigned to follow specific users on the Blackboard Learning System without interacting with the
system. Observers are able to view the course and track Student progress. Also, the Instructor can
communicate Early Warning System notifications to Observers as well as the Student, or just to the
Observers of the Student.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Observer Access page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Observer Access.
Allow Observers
Select Yes in the Allow Observers: field to allow Observers to access the course.
When set to Yes, Observers can access content in the course. Observers cannot access
Assessments or Assignments. Observers can be restricted from viewing content or tools on an
individual basis. Restrict Observer access to content on the Manage Course Menu page. Restrict
Observer access to tools on the Manage Tools page. Both Manage Course Menu and Manage
Tools are found under the Course Options heading on the Control Panel.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 188 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE DURATION
Overview
Instructors set the length of the course from the Course Duration page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Duration page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Duration.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Duration page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Course Duration
Continuous
Select this option to make the course always available.
Select Dates
Select this option to set the course availability for specific
dates. The course may also begin on a specific date and
not have a specific end date.
After the end date, the course is no longer available for
Students but is otherwise unchanged.
Days (from the date
of enrollment)
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Select this option to place a time limit on a self-paced
course. The course will be available for that number of
days from the time a Student enrolls.
Page 189 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ENROLLMENT OPTIONS
Overview
Instructors can lead enrollment by processing enrollment requests from Students through the
Control Panel. Enrollment can also be limited to a set time and to require an access code.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Enrollment Options page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Enrollment Options.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Enrollment Options page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Enrollment Options
Instructor/Admin
Select this option to make course enrollment Instructor
led. Select the check box to create a link for Students to
email an enrollment request to the Instructor. The link
appears in the course catalog.
Self Enrollment
Select this option to allow Students to enroll in a course.
Start Date
Select this option to set an enrollment start date. If Self
Enrollment is selected this date is required.
End Date
Select this option to set an enrollment end date. If Self
Enrollment is selected this date is required.
Require Access Code
to Enroll
Select this option to require an access code to enroll.
Enter an access code that must then be distributed to
approved Students. This access code will be required for
Students to enroll in the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 190 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CATEGORIZE COURSE
Overview
Instructors indicate where in the Course Catalog the course will appear from the Categorize Course
page. The Instructor may select multiple categories.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Categorize Course page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Categorize Course.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Categorize Course page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Categorize Course
Add Category
Select a catalog category. Click Add. More than one category
may be selected. Repeat the process to add another
category. The course will appear under the selected
categories.
Currently Categorized
In
Displays the catalog categories that have been selected.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
To remove a category, click Remove next to the category
that is to be removed.
Page 191 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SET COURSE ENTRY POINT
Overview
The default course entry point is the Announcements page. In some courses, it may be
advantageous to change the entry point to another area. This can be done on the Set Course Entry
Point page.
Note: Setting a new course entry point takes effect immediately.
However, the user that sets the new course entry point will not see the
effect of the change until the user logs out of the Blackboard Learning
System and logs back in.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Set Course Entry Point page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Set Course Entry Point.
Field
Click the drop-down arrow in the Entry Point field and choose the course area that will appear
when a user enters the course.
If the Course Entry Point is changed, the Instructor must clear the cache or refresh the system to
view the change. To refresh on Internet Explorer go to View and click Shift + Refresh. On
Macintosh select Shift + Refresh.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 192 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COPY, IMPORT, ARCHIVE AND RECYCLE
Overview
Course Options also includes tools to copy a course, archive or recycle the course, and import
content.
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Recycle Course
Recycle a course by selecting areas to keep and areas to
remove.
Course Copy
Copy courses taught by the same Instructor.
Import Package
Add a package containing an exported course the current
course.
Export/Archive
Manager
Create course packages through Export and Archive features.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 193 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
RECYCLE COURSE
Overview
The Recycle Course page is a useful tool for Instructors to use at the end of a course. It allows
Instructors to select information to be deleted from a course and keeps the rest of the course areas
for use in the future. For example, remove Students and grades but keep content.
The Course Recycler will remove all users with a role of Student from the course. Teaching
Assistants, Graders, and Course Builders will not be removed.
Note: Use Archive Course to create a permanent record of the course
before recycling.
Find this page
Click Recycle Course in Course Options on the Control Panel to open the Recycle Course page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Content Materials to Remove
Select the check boxes for areas within the course that will be deleted. For example, if
Staff Information is selected all of the data within Staff Information will be deleted.
Select Other Course Materials to Remove
Select the check boxes for areas within the course that will be deleted. For example, if
Discussion Board is selected all of the Discussion Boards in the course will be deleted.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 194 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COPY COURSE
Overview
Copy Course can be used in several different ways:
•
Copy selected course materials into a new course to create a new section of the same
course.
•
Copy selected course materials into an existing course to share content across several
courses without having to recreate the content in each course.
•
Copy just enrollments (or enrollments and selected content and tools) to easily move
users from one sequential course to the next course.
•
Create an exact copy of a course, including enrollments and user data.
Note: A user can only copy materials into a course where the user has
a role of Instructor, Teaching Assistant, or Course Builder.
Find this page
Select Copy Course on the Control Panel to open the Copy Course page.
Available functions
The following functions are accessible from the Copy Course page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
Copy some or all of the
course materials into a
new course
Copy Course Materials into a New Course
Copy some or all of the
course materials into an
existing course
Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course
Make an exact copy of
the course including
enrollments
Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy)
Content System items
When a course is copied, links to Content Collection items within the course are included. The
permissions to these items must be updated so users in the new course can successfully access
these links. See the topic Course Copy and Content System Items for additional information.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 195 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COPY COURSE MATERIALS INTO A NEW COURSE
Overview
Copying course materials into a new course creates a course in the system and populates it with
content from a course already on the system. The Course Menu specified in the source course will
replace the default Course Menu in the new course.
Find this page
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course Materials into a New Course page.
1.
Click Course Copy from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Copy Course Materials into a New Course from the Copy Course page.
Destination Course ID
Enter a Course ID for the new course that will be created and populated with content from the
current course. Please make sure that the new Course ID matches the naming convention used at
the institution. Also, he Course ID should not have any spaces or characters other than numbers
and letters (A-Z), dash (-), underscore (_), and period (.). The Course ID must be unique and
remain static. It cannot be modified.
Select course materials
Select the check boxes for each course area and tool in the course that should be copied into the
new course. The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the copy is
performed.
Note: A Course Copy operation cannot be completed if the user does
not select at least one of the following areas: Content, Staff Information
or Settings. If none of these options is selected a warning will appear.
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Content
Copies course materials, including uploaded files,
Learning Units, links. Users may also select to
include Course Information, Course documents,
Assignments, and External Links.
Announcements
All Announcements are copied to the new course.
This option must be selected or the links in
Announcements to Assessments will be broken.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
All Assessments and Surveys, including questions
and options for deploying them are copied. All
Pools are copied to the new course.
Calendar
All Calendar events are copied to the new course.
Collaboration Sessions
Copies Collaboration Sessions.
Course Settings
Some Course Settings will be copied. See Course
Settings below for more information.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WHEN COPIED
Page 196 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Discussion Board
Discussion Board forums, including the initial posts
in each forum, are copied to the new course.
Gradebook Items and
Settings
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such
as type, categories, and display options, are
copied to the new course.
Group Settings
Settings include the names of the Groups, the
settings for tool availability, and the Discussion
Board forum names.
Staff Information
All Staff Information is copied to the new course.
WHEN COPIED
Course Cartridge content
Copy Protected Cartridge content is only copied if the Course Cartridge Materials option is
selected. This option only appears if there is Copy Protected Cartridge content in the course. The
destination course maintains the availability settings for the source course.
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are copied to the new course. These include the
following:
•
Course Name
•
Course Description
•
Course Entry Point
•
Course Design
•
Course Banner
•
Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not overwritten.
The following settings are not copied as part of this operation:
•
Course ID
•
Course Availability
•
Guest Access
•
Observer Access
•
Course Duration
•
Enrollment Options
Select Enrollments
If Enrollment is selected, the list of users in the course will be copied.
User records in the course will not be copied. This includes the following:
•
Gradebook Records
•
Discussion Board posts (including Groups Discussion Board posts)
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 197 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
•
Archived Discussion Board messages (including Groups Discussion Board posts)
•
Drop Box files
•
Assessment attempts
•
Assignment submissions
•
Course Statistics
•
Collaboration session logs
•
User Home pages
•
The Electric Blackboard® entries
User records are only copied if the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) option is selected.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 198 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COPY COURSE MATERIALS INTO AN EXISTING COURSE
Overview
The Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course page enables Instructors to copy content from
one course into another they are teaching. Instructors can select areas, such as Announcements,
Staff Information or Course areas to copy. Copy Course will add content to a course, but it will not
remove existing content.
Find this page
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course Materials into a New Course page.
1.
Click Course Copy from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course from the Copy Course page.
Destination Course ID
Enter a Course ID for the destination course or click Browse to open a Search function in a
separate window.
Select course materials
Select the check boxes for each course area and tool in the course that should be copied into the
existing course. The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the copy is
performed.
Note: A Course Copy operation cannot be completed if the user does
not select at least one of the following areas: Content, Staff Information
or Settings. If none of these options is selected a warning will appear.
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Content
Copies course materials, including uploaded files,
Learning Units, and links. Users may also select to
include Course Information, Course documents,
Assignments, and External Links.
Announcements
All Announcements are copied to the new course.
This option must be selected or the links in
Announcements to Assessments will be broken.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
All Assessments and Surveys, including questions
and options for deploying them are copied. All
Pools are copied to the new course.
Calendar
All Calendar events are copied to the new course.
Collaboration Sessions
Collaboration Sessions.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WHEN COPIED
Page 199 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Course Settings
Some Course Settings will be copied. See Course
Settings below for more information.
Discussion Board
Discussion Board forums, including the initial posts
in each forum, are copied to the new course.
Gradebook Items and
Settings
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such
as type, categories, and display options, are
copied to the new course.
Group Settings
Settings include the names of the Groups, the
settings for tool availability, and the Discussion
Board forum names.
Staff Information
All Staff Information is copied to the new course.
WHEN COPIED
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are copied to the existing course. These
include the following:
•
Course Entry Point
•
Course Design
•
Course Banner
•
Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not overwritten.
The following settings are not copied as part of this operation:
•
Course ID
•
Course Name
•
Course Description
•
Course Availability
•
Guest Access
•
Observer Access
•
Course Duration
•
Enrollment Options
Resolving Course Menu items
When copying content and tools from one course to an existing course, the Course Menu must
resolve itself in the destination course. The table below describes the how Course Menu items are
resolved.
IF . . .
THEN
a Course area in the source course
does not exist in the destination course
the area will be added to the Course Menu
in the destination course.
the Course area in the source course
and the Course area in the destination
the content from the source course will be
added, but will not replace, the content in
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 200 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
IF . . .
THEN
course have the same name and are of
the same type (for example, External
Links, Staff Information, or content)
the area within the destination course.
...
the Course area in the source course
and the Course area in the destination
course have the same name but are of
different types
the Course area from the source course
will be added to the destination course
under a different name. The new name
will append an incremental numeral to the
name (for example, Course Materials will
become Course Materials1).
Links
Links to parts of a course that are not included in the copy will break when the links appear in the
destination course. For example, if there is a link to a Test in a course area and Assessments are
not copied, the link to the test will break.
Course Cartridge content
The Course Cartridge Materials option is only successful if the source course includes Copy
Protected cartridge content and the destination course does not have a Cartridge ID. If this option
is selected, the Copy Protected cartridge content will be copied to the destination course with the
Cartridge ID assigned. This option only appears if there is Copy Protected Cartridge content in the
source course.
If the destination course already has a Cartridge ID (meaning it already includes Copy Protected
cartridge content), neither the cartridge content nor the Cartridge ID may be copied from the source
course to the destination course. If the Course Cartridge Materials option is selected, the copy
operation will be successful, but a note in the receipt states that the Course Cartridge Materials will
not be copied.
If the source course and the destination course have the same Cartridge ID, the content may be
copied successfully.
Select Enrollments
If Enrollment is selected, the list of users in the course will be copied.
User records in the course will not be copied. This includes the following:
•
Gradebook Records
•
Discussion Board posts (including Groups Discussion Board posts)
•
Archived Discussion Board messages (including Groups Discussion Board posts)
•
Drop Box files
•
Assessment attempts
•
Assignment submissions
•
Course Statistics
•
Collaboration session logs
•
User Home pages
•
The Electric Blackboard® entries
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 201 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
User records are only copied if the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) option is selected.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 202 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COPY COURSE WITH USERS (EXACT COPY)
Overview
Copy Course with Users performs a complete copy of the course. This is the only Copy option that
copies user records, such as grades and Discussion Board posts, to the new course. This option is
useful if a course is split into multiple sections. The Instructor may do an exact copy and then unenroll specific students to create two sections of the same course.
Note: All Course Cartridge content is copied during a Copied Course
with Users operation.
Find this page
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy).
1.
Click Course Copy from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) from the Copy Course page.
Copy the Course
Enter the Course ID for the Destination Course and select Submit. The new course will contain all
of the same content and all of the same user enrollments and staff assignments as the current
course.
Please make sure that the new Course ID matches the naming convention used at the institution.
Also, the Course ID should not have any spaces or characters other than numbers and letters,
dash (-), underscore (_), and period (.). The Course ID must be unique and remain static. It cannot
be modified.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 203 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
IMPORT PACKAGE
Overview
Instructors may use the Import Package page to upload course materials from another course. For
example, if they have exported a course they may import the whole course package, or selected
parts of the course through Import Package.
Never upload an Exported Course package that has been modified since it was created and
downloaded. Opening the .ZIP file and changing any of the files in the Exported Course package
will result in unstable and unpredictable behavior when the course is imported.
Find this Page
Click Import Package under Course Options on the Control Panel to open the Import Course
Cartridge page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Import Package page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select a Course
Destination Course ID
Displays the Course ID for the course.
Select a Package
Please Browse for the
location of the
packaged course
Either enter the path to the course package or click Browse
to search for the course package.
Course areas
Select the option for each course area and tool in the course that should be imported.
The Select course materials section below details these options.
Select course materials
The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the import is performed.
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Content
Imports course materials, including the following,
from the package:
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WHEN COPIED
•
Uploaded files
•
Learning Units
•
Links
Page 204 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
C OURSE M ATERIAL
Instructor Manual
B EHAVIOR
WHEN COPIED
•
Course Information
•
Course Documents
•
Assignments
•
External Links
•
Building Block content
Announcements
All Announcements are imported. If Assessment
links appear in Course areas, then this option must
be selected, or the link to the Assessment will be
broken.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
All Assessments and Surveys, including questions
and options for deploying them are imported. All
Pools are imported to the new course.
Calendar
All Calendar items are imported to the new course.
Course Settings
Some Course Settings will be imported. See
Course Setting below for more information.
Discussion Board
Discussion Board forums, including the initial
message in the Discussion Board, are imported.
Gradebook Items and
Settings
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such as
type, categories, and display options, are
imported.
Group Settings
Settings include the names of the Groups, the
settings for tool availability, and the Discussion
Board forum names.
Staff Information
All Staff Information is imported.
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are imported to the course. These include the
following:
•
Course Name
•
Course Description
•
Course Entry Point
•
Course Design
•
Course Banner
Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not overwritten.
The following settings are not imported as part of this operation:
•
Course ID
•
Course Availability
•
Guest Access
•
Observer Access
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 205 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
•
Course Duration
•
Enrollment Options
Instructor Manual
Resolving the Course Menu items
When importing a package, the Course Menu must resolve itself in the destination course. The
table below describes the how Course Menu items are resolved.
IF . . .
THEN
...
a Course area in the package does not
exist in the destination course
the area will be added to the Course Menu
in the destination course.
the Course area in the package and the
Course area in the destination course
have the same name and are of the
same type (for example, External Links,
Staff Information, or content)
the content from the package will be
added, but will not replace, the content in
the area within the destination course.
the Course area in the package and the
Course area in the destination course
have the same name but are of different
types
the Course area from the package will be
added to the destination course under a
different name. The new name will append
an incremental numeral to the name (for
example, Course Materials will become
Course Materials1).
Course Links
Links to parts of a course that are not included in the export package will break when the links
appear in the destination course. For example, if there is a link to a Test in a course area and
Tests, Surveys and Pools are not exported, the link to the Test will break.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 206 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
EXPORT / ARCHIVE MANAGER
Overview
The Export / Archive Manager page organizes all export and archive packages that are created
from the course. When the course is exported or archived, a link to the package appears on this
page. The Instructor may download the package to a local computer, and then use it in the future
for import or restore operations.
When a package is exported or archived, it does not appear on this page immediately. An email is
sent to the user once the system has created the package; the user may then open this page to
find the package and download it.
Note: It is recommended that packages be removed from this page once
they are downloaded. Each package counts against the course quota; so
keeping packages on this page may result in limited space to add
additional content to the course.
Find this page
Click Export Courses from the Control Panel to open the Export / Archive Manager page.
Functions
The following table details the functions available from the Export / Archive Manager page.
TO . . .
CLICK
export a course
Export in the Action Bar. The Export Course page appears.
archive a course
Archive in the Action Bar. The Archive Course page appears.
download a course
package
the link to the package in the File column. Save the .zip file to a
local computer.
view the log details
Log next to the package. The Log page appears.
view the package
creation details
Detailed Log next to the package. The Detailed Log page
appears explaining the different parts of the operation.
remove a course
package
Remove next to the package.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 207 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
EXPORT COURSE
Overview
The Export Course feature creates a package of the course content that can later be imported and
used to teach another course with the same content. It is important to note that, unlike the Archive
Course feature, Export Course does not include any user interactions with the course—it only
includes the content and the tools.
Export packages are downloaded as compressed .ZIP files and are imported in the same format.
Do not unzip an Export package or remove files from the package, otherwise the package will not
be imported correctly.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Manage Exports page.
1.
Click Export Course from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Export from the Action Bar of the Export / Archive Manager page.
Select course materials
The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the export is performed.
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Content
Exports course materials, including uploaded files,
Learning Units, and links. Users may also select to
include Course Information, Course documents,
Assignments and External Links.
Announcements
All Announcements are exported.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
All Assessments and Surveys, including questions
and options for deploying them are imported. All
Pools are exported.
Calendar
All Calendar items are exported to the new course.
Course Settings
Some Course Settings will be exported. See
Course Setting below for more information.
Discussion Board
Discussion Board forums, including the initial
message in the Discussion Board, are exported.
Gradebook Items and
Settings
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such
as type, categories, and display options, are
exported.
Group Settings
Settings include the names of the Groups, the
settings for tool availability, and the Discussion
Board forum names.
Staff Information
All Staff Information is exported.
WHEN
E XPORTED
Course Settings
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 208 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
When Course Settings is selected, settings are exported. These include the following:
•
Course Name
•
Course Description
•
Course Entry Point
•
Course Design
•
Course Banner
•
Blackboard Tools
•
Building Block Tools
•
Content Tools
•
Course ID
•
Course Availability
•
Guest Access
•
Observer Access
•
Course Duration
•
Enrollment Options
Note: For information on which settings are included in an import
operation, see the Import Package topic.
Download the course package
After the Export Course page is submitted the system creates the course package. When the
package is complete, the Instructor who initiated the operation receives an email. After the email is
received, Instructors may open the Export / Archive Manager page in the Blackboard application
and download the course package to the local computer.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 209 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ARCHIVE COURSE
Overview
Archive Course creates a permanent record of a course including all the content and user
interactions.
Archived courses are saved as .zip files. Archiving a course does not remove it from the system.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Archive Course page.
1.
Click Archive Course from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Archive from the Action Bar of the Export / Archive Manager page.
Create Archive
Select Submit to archive the course contents and save it for future use.
Download the course package
After the Archive Course page is submitted the system creates the course package. When the
package is complete, the Instructor who initiated the operation receives an email. After the email is
received, the Instructors may open the Export / Archive Manager page in the Blackboard
application and download the course package to the local computer.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 210 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE CARTRIDGES
Overview
Course Cartridges allows Instructors to access sets of teaching tools provided by academic
publishers. Chalk Titles are Course Cartridges that are integrated with external applications and
content from publishers
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Import Course
Cartridges
Explains how to add Course Cartridges to the course.
About Chalk Titles
Provides and explanation of Chalk Titles and their features.
Also gives tips in troubleshooting.
Manage Chalk
Titles
Explains how to manage Chalk Titles within a course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 211 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
IMPORT COURSE CARTRIDGE
Overview
Course Cartridges enable Instructors to gain access to complete sets of teaching tools provided by
academic publishers. In one central location, Instructors can find relevant, publisher-created
materials. Once the materials are downloaded to a Blackboard Learning System Course,
Instructors are free to customize the content by adding and deleting materials as needed to
correlate with specific topics covered in the classroom.
Course Cartridges can serve as supplements to existing online courses, or provide an excellent
start for faculty who are just beginning to develop online teaching strategies. Instructors will benefit
from the ease of use, variety, and professional quality of the materials available on Course
Cartridges.
Instructors download Course Cartridges from the Course Cartridge Repository and install cartridges
into Courses through the Control Panel.
Find this Page
Click Import Course Cartridge in Course Options on the Control Panel to open the Import Course
Cartridge page.
Field
Enter the Course Cartridge Download Key in the field provided. Course Cartridge content will be
added to course materials.
Note: The Download Key can be obtained from the publisher. Without a
Download Key, it is not possible to add Course Cartridge content.
Copy Protection
Cartridges may be designated as Copy Protected or Open Access. Only one Copy Protected
cartridge may exist in a course. Open Access cartridges may be downloaded by Instructors into
courses that already contain cartridge content. Therefore, a course may contain one Copy
Protected cartridge and multiple Open Access cartridges.
Once an Open Access cartridge is added to a course, the content from this cartridge acts like all
other content. This content is not differentiated during operations, such as Course Copy.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 212 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Download a Course Cartridge
Follow the steps below to download a Course Cartridge.
1.
Select a textbook with a companion Course Cartridge by browsing the Course Cartridge
Catalog, located at http://cartridgecatalog.blackboard.com/catalog/
2.
Obtain the Instructor Download Key from the textbook publisher.
3.
Begin the Course creation process.
4.
During the course creation process, enter the Instructor Download Key obtained in Step 2.
5.
Click Submit to create the course.
6.
An email will arrive when the Course Cartridge has finished loading into your new course.
How Students access course cartridges
Students must follow the steps below to access the Course Cartridge materials.
1.
Enroll Students in the Course.
2.
Instruct Students to purchase required textbook or other publisher provided materials that
contain the Access Key.
3.
When first accessing the Course content, Students will be required to enter an Access
Key. Once validated, Students will no longer need the Access Key.
Cartridge functionality
There are no restrictions on Open Access cartridge content during import, export, archive, restore
or copy operations. This content is treated like other content in the course
Copy Protected cartridge content functions in the following ways:
•
Archive: When a course is archived all cartridge content in the course is saved with the
archive.
•
Restore: When an archived course is restored by the System Administrator, the cartridge
content is included in the restored course.
•
Export: When a course is exported, cartridge content is not included.
•
Import: The only time cartridge content is included during a course import is if the
package was created as an archive. Cartridge content is not included in exported
packages.
•
Copy: Cartridge content is always included in a Course Copy with Users (exact copy)
operation. The user has the option to include cartridge content as part of a Copy Course
Materials into a New course operation or a Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course
operation.
Note: Content from only one Copy Protected cartridge may be copied
into a course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 213 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ABOUT CHALK TITLES
Overview
Chalk Titles are Course Cartridges that are integrated with external applications and content from
publishers. Chalk Titles include both content and tools. Tools included in a Chalk Title connect to
an outside source to run each tool.
Chalk Titles are installed in the same way as other Course Cartridges. Like other Course
Cartridges, Chalk Titles require a download key and student access keys.
Important features in Chalk Titles include:
•
Integration with the course: Chalk Titles link courses to applications running on the
publisher's servers. These applications are often popular tools that are familiar to
Instructors. Please contact the publisher for more information about the applications
included with a Chalk Title.
•
Single Sign-on: Users that are logged into the course are logged into the publisher
applications linked to the course. Users pass between the course and the publisher
application seamlessly.
•
Roster synchronization: Users enrolled in the course are automatically enrolled in the
publisher application.
•
Grade passing: Grades from the publisher application are passed to the course.
Chalk Title tools appear in the Tools area of the Control Panel after a Chalk Title is added to a
course. Instructors can restrict availability to Chalk Title tools in the same way that they can restrict
availability to other tools.
The System Administrator may restrict the availability of Chalk Title tools in all courses. By default,
Instructors can use Chalk Title tools in courses.
Chalk Title Tools can synch with the Gradebook in a course to report Student performance. Note
that Student attempts are stored on the server that runs the tool, not within the course. Therefore,
Student attempts are not included when the course is archived. The reported grade is the only
recorded information about a Student attempt.
Chalk Title tools will not work if a course that contains Chalk Title tools is exported or archived and
later added to system that does not support Chalk Titles.
Troubleshooting
It is important to remember when reporting problems with a Chalk Title that Chalk Title tools and
content are linked to outside servers hosted by publishers. In many cases, the problem may be with
the publisher server. Make sure to let the System Administrator know that a problem is related to
Chalk Title tool.
Privacy Settings
To fully use links added to a course by a Chalk Title, the user's browser settings must be set to
Accept All Cookies or to be set to accept cookies from Chalk provider’s server.
If the browser privacy settings are set on Medium or High, cookies from third party content,
including Chalk applications, are silently blocked. Users will receive an error message when
attempting to access some of the links for a Chalk Title.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 214 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
The privacy settings can be maintained at Medium or High if the user specifically sets the browser
to accept cookies from the Chalk provider’s server. Contact the Chalk Title publisher for additional
information.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 215 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANAGE CHALK TITLES
Overview
It is important to consider user privacy when making a Chalk Title available to Students. Outside
servers use personal information, such as name and email address to provide the tool and link the
tool with the Gradebook.
The Manage Chalk Title page presents options for controlling access to personal information.
Instructors can require Students to fill out an authorization form before accessing a Chalk Title.
Instructors receive a privacy notice when they first access a Chalk Title. This message can be set
to display each time an Instructor accesses a Chalk Title. It is a good idea to display this message
each time if more than one user is responsible for teaching a course.
Find this page
Click Manage Chalk Title from the Control Panel.
Fields
The following fields appear on the Manage Chalk Title page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Define Privacy Policy
Does each student need to
provide online authorization
before that student's
personal information can be
displayed to the Publisher?
Select Yes to require authorization from Students
to release their personal information to the
publisher's server.
Specify your preference
Should Instructors see a
Privacy Notice each time they
request a Publisher
Resource?
Select Yes to display the privacy notice each time
an Instructor accesses a Chalk Title tool.
USER MANAGEMENT
Overview
Instructors can manage the users in their Courses. For example, Instructors may:
•
add and drop individuals or groups of Students to and from a course
•
create new users
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 216 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
•
Instructor Manual
create groups of users within in a course
Some options for managing users may be turned off by the System Administrator.
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
List/Modify Users
Explains how to update user information.
Create User
Provides information on creating user accounts.
Batch Create
Users for Course
Describes the function to create a set of users for a course.
Enroll User
Explains how to enroll users in a course.
Remove Users
from the Course
Explains how Instructors remove users from the course.
Manage Groups
Provides information for creating and modifying groups of users
within a course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 217 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
LIST/MODIFY USERS
Overview
User Management enables the Instructor to manage the users in their Course. The List/Modify
Users page enables Instructors to change a user’s role within a course and update user profiles.
Instructors can also send email to a user.
If the User is unavailable, that user cannot access the Blackboard Learning System. If the User
Enrollment record is unavailable, the user can access the system but cannot access the course.
Icons to denote a state of unavailable will appear next to the User Name if applicable to the User
record. If applicable to the User Enrollment record, the icon will appear next to the User Role.
User records or User Enrollment records that are set to Unavailable are preceded by a circle
symbol with a slash through it. Also, the record will appear in gray text with the exception of the
email address, which may still be clicked to send a message to the user. To make a record
available, click Properties to modify the User Enrollment record and change the availability setting.
Find this page
To open the List/Modify Users page, select List/Modify Users in the User Management area on
the Control Panel.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on the List/Modify Users page after generating a list
of users.
TO . . .
CLICK .
send an email to a
user
the email address to open the Compose Email page.
edit a user password
Password.
edit a user profile
Properties.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
..
Page 218 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CHANGE PASSWORD
Overview
Instructors can update a user’s password from the Change Password page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Change Password page.
1.
Select List/Modify Users in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Search for a user.
3.
Click Change Password next to a user.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Change Password page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Change Password
Password [r]
Enter the new password.
Verify Password
[r]
Re-enter the new password.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 219 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CREATE USER AND MODIFY USER
Overview
Instructors can create a profile for a user on the Create User page. Creating a user within a Course
also enrolls the user in the Course.
After creating a user, Instructors can update a user’s profile information, including the Course role,
from the Modify User Properties page.
Note: The names of these fields can be changed by the System
Administrator. If a link appears at the top of this page it will connect to
another information system where some of the values that appear on
this page may be edited.
Find this page
Click Create User in User Management on the Control Panel to open the Create User page.
Follow the steps below to open the Modify User Properties page.
1.
Select List/Modify Users in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Search for a user.
3.
Click Properties next to a user.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create User page and the Modify User page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Personal Information
First Name [r]
Enter the user’s first name.
Middle Name
Enter the user’s middle name.
Last Name [r]
Enter the user’s last name.
Email [r]
Enter the user’s email address.
Student ID
Enter the user’s Student ID as defined by the institution.
Account Information
Username [r]
Enter a user name for the new user. Do not include any
spaces. This field is required.
Password
Enter a password for the user’s account. The password must
be at least one character and contain no spaces.
Verify Password
Enter the password again. Use the Change Password page to
change the password of an existing user.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 220 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F IELD
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
Other Information
Gender
Enter the user’s gender.
Birthdate
Select the user’s birthday.
Education Level
Enter the user’s education level.
Company
Enter the user’s company.
Job Title
Enter the user’s job title.
Department
Enter the user’s department.
Street 1
Enter the user’s address.
Street 2
Enter any additional address information.
City
Enter the user’s city.
State/Province
Enter the user’s state or province.
ZIP/Postal Code
Enter the user’s ZIP code or postal code.
Country
Enter the user’s country.
Web Site
Enter the URL of the user’s personal Web site. When adding a
URL, do so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com
Home Phone
Enter the home phone number of the user. The phone number
will display exactly as entered.
Work Phone
Enter the work phone number of the user. The phone number
will display exactly as entered.
Work Fax
Enter the fax of the user. The fax number will display exactly as
entered.
Mobile Phone
Enter the mobile phone of the user. The phone number will
display exactly as entered.
Role and Availability
Role and
Availability
Available (this
Select a role option. Available roles are:
•
Student: User is able to access all available Course
content and will be graded on Assessments.
•
Instructor: User is able to control all aspects of the
course through the Control Panel.
•
Teacher’s Assistant: User is able to control most
aspects of the course through the Control Panel.
•
Grader: User is able to access all areas under
Assessments.
•
Course Builder: User is able to add content to the
course through the Control Panel.
•
Guest: Guests are able to view areas of the course, but
cannot participate in any way.
Select Yes or No from the drop-down list. If Yes is selected,
the user will have access to the Course. If No is selected, the
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 221 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
course only)
user will not be able to access the Course. This option can be
modified after the user is created to control access throughout
the user’s involvement with the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 222 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
BATCH CREATE USERS FOR COURSE PAGE
Overview
Instructors may quickly add numbers of users to the course from the Batch Create Users for
Course page. Users can be added with any Course Role.
Note: If using a batch file created for a previous version of the
Blackboard Learning System, verify that the fields are in the correct
order for the current version.
Find this page
Click Batch Create Users for Course in User Management on the Control Panel to open the
Batch Create Users for Course page.
Batch files
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the system. Each batch
utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The following batch file standards are
universal.
•
Fields must be enclosed in double quotes.
Example: “John”
•
Each field must be separated with a delimiter. Commas, colons or tabs may be used;
however, you may not use more than one as a delimiter in a batch file.
Example:
“John”,”Smith”
•
Each record must be separated by a hard return.
Example:
“John”,”Smith”
“Larry”,”Smith”
•
Each batch file should not exceed 500 records due to time out restrictions associated with
most browsers.
•
Do not include blank lines between records. The blank line will be processed and return
an error.
•
If quotation marks appear in a field, it is necessary to use an escape character so the
process knows that the next character does not mark the end of the field. The escape
character is a backslash (\). For example, "\"NICKNAME\"".
Fields
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 223 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
The table below details the fields on the Batch Create Users for Course page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
File Upload
File Location
Enter the location of the batch user file.
Delimiter Type of
Your File
Select Comma, Tab, or Colon delimiter for the file. Select
Automatic and the delimiter will be determined automatically.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 224 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ENROLL USER
Overview
Instructors may enroll an existing user into the course using the Enroll User page.
Find this page
Click Enroll User in User Management on the Control Panel to open the Enroll User page.
Enroll Users
Select the check box next to the names of the users to enroll and click Submit.
Only 20 names will appear on a page. If more the 20 users are found during the search, multiple
pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and submit users from one page at a time. For
example, if the search returns three pages of users, the Instructor must select the users to add on
the first page and click Submit before continuing to the next page.
Users are enrolled with a Course role of Student by default.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 225 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
REMOVE USERS FROM THE COURSE
Overview
Instructors may remove users from a course. When a user is removed from a course all of the
information associated with the user, such as, Gradebook information, Drop Box files, is removed.
Note: Removed users cannot be restored to the course. To restore a
removed user, the user must be enrolled in the course again.
Find this page
Click Remove Users from the Course in the User Management area of the Control Panel to open
the Remove User from the Course page.
Select the check box next to the names of the users to remove and type Yes in the field at the
bottom of the page. A message will appear verifying that the user should be removed. This action is
irreversible.
Only 20 names will appear on a page. If more the 20 users are found during the search, multiple
pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and remove users from one page at a time. For
example, if the search returns three pages of users, the Instructor must select the users to remove
on the first page and click Submit before continuing to the next page.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 226 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANAGE GROUPS
Overview
On the Manage Groups page Instructors can build study or project groups. Instructors can also
remove and modify groups from this page. The Instructor has the option of giving the group access
to these features:
•
Discussion Board
•
Virtual Classroom
•
Group File Exchange
•
Group Email
The features that are chosen are displayed on the Manage Groups page under the group name.
Find this page
Click Manage Groups in User Management on the Control Panel to open the Manage Groups
page.
Functions
The table below details the available functions on this page.
TO . . .
CLICK .
..
add a group
Add Group. The Add Group page will appear.
Once a Group has been created Students must be added.
Click Modify to access the Manage Group page and add
users to that group.
modify a group
Modify. A Manage Group page will appear. On the
Manage Group page group properties may be modified,
new Students may be added, Group users may be listed or
modified, and users may be removed from the group.
remove a group
Remove. This action is irreversible.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 227 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD GROUP / GROUP PROPERTIES
Overview
Groups are created on the Add Group page. These options may be modified on the Group
Properties page.
Find this page
From the Manage Groups page:
1.
Click Add Group to create a new group.
2.
Click Modify to change the properties for a specific group.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Main Group Information
Group name
Enter a Group name.
Description
Enter a description of the Group.
Group Options
Enable Group
Discussion Board
Function
Select this check box to indicate that this Group will have
access to the Discussion Board functions.
Enable Group Virtual
Classroom Function
Select this check box to indicate that this Group will have
access to the Virtual Classroom functions.
Enable Group File
Exchange Function
Select this check box to indicate that this Group will have
access to the group file exchange function.
Enable Group Email
Function
Select this check box to indicate that this Group will have
access to the group email function.
Make group visible
now
Click Yes to make the group available.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
If this check box is not selected this Group will not have
access to the Discussion Board functions.
Page 228 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MODIFY GROUP
Overview
Once a Group is created Instructors can modify the group and assign users. The Instructor has the
option of giving the Group Discussion Board functions, Virtual Classroom functions, group file
exchange functions, and group email functions.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Group page.
1.
Click Manage Groups in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to a Group.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Manage Group page:
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Group Properties
Modify the Group name, description, or options.
Add Users to
Group
Add Students to the group.
List Users in
Group
List or modify users in a Group.
Remove Users
From Group
Remove users from a Group.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 229 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD USERS TO GROUP
Overview
Users are added to the Group using the Add Users to Group page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Users to Group page.
1.
Click Manage Groups in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to a Group.
3.
Click Add Users to Group.
Add a User to a Group
Once the search has been completed, select the check box next to a user to add to the Group and
click Submit.
Only 20 names will appear on a page. If more the 20 users are found during the search, multiple
pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and submit users from one page at a time. For
example, if the search returns three pages of users, the Instructor must select the users to add on
the first page and click Submit before continuing to the next page.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 230 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
LIST USERS IN GROUP
Overview
Users in a Group can be viewed and contacted using the List Users in Group page. Click on an
email address to send a message to that user.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the List Users in Group page.
1.
Click Manage Groups in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to a Group.
3.
Click List Users in Group.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 231 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
REMOVE USERS FROM GROUP
Overview
Instructors may drop users from a Group. If a user is removed from a Group all of the information
associated with that user, such as files in the File Exchange and Discussion Board messages, is
removed. Removed users cannot be restored to the Group. Removed users must be added again.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Remove Users From Group page.
1.
Click Manage Groups in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to a Group.
3.
Click Remove Users From Group.
Remove a User from the Group
Select the check boxes of the users to remove. Type Yes in the entry field at the bottom of the
page and click Submit. The selected users and all information associated with those users will be
removed from the Group. This action is irreversible.
Only 20 names will appear on a page. If more the 20 users are found during the search, multiple
pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and remove users from one page at a time. For
example, if the search returns three pages of users, the Instructor must select the users to remove
on the first page and click Submit before continuing to the next page.
ASSESSMENT
Overview
Instructors use Assessments to test Student knowledge, measure Student progress, and gather
information from Students. There are two types of Assessments:
•
Tests – Tests are created to check the knowledge and skill level of users enrolled in the
course. Tests permit the Instructor to assign point values to each question on exams or
quizzes. When a Student completes a Test it is submitted for grading. The results are
recorded in the Gradebook.
•
Surveys – Surveys are useful for polling purposes, evaluations, and random checks of
knowledge. They function in the same way as Tests and offer most of the same options.
Questions on Surveys are not assigned a point value. Surveys are not graded.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 232 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
About
Assessments
An overview for planning and organizing Assessments.
Test Manager
Explains how to create and manage Tests.
How to Create or
Modify a Test
Describes the process for creating a Test.
Test Info
Explains the data used to describe a test.
Test Canvas
Describes the area used to add questions and organize a Test.
Test Creation
Settings
Explains the options used to control the availability of Test
features.
Question
Completion Status
Describes how the question completion status feature informs
users of which questions they have answered.
Multiple Choice
Questions
Reviews how to add or modify questions.
True/False
Questions
Describes True/False questions.
Fill in the Blank
Questions
Describes Fill in the Blank questions.
Multiple Answer
Questions
Describes Multiple Answer questions.
Matching
Questions
Describes Matching questions.
Ordering
Questions
Describes Ordering questions.
Essay Questions
Describes Essay questions.
Calculated
Questions
Describes Calculated questions.
Numeric Response
Questions
Describes Numeric Response questions.
File Response
Questions
Describes File Response questions.
Hot Spot
Questions
Describes Hot Spot questions.
Multiple Fill in the
Blank Questions
Describes Multiple Fill in the Blank questions.
Jumbled Sentence
Questions
Describes Jumbled Sentence questions.
Opinion Scale
Questions
Describes Opinion Scale questions.
Short Response
Questions
Describes Short Response questions.
Either/Or
Describes Either/Or questions.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 233 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
S ECTION
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
Questions
Quiz Bowl
Questions
Describes Quiz Bowl questions.
Add/Modify
Random Block
Explains how to add a random set of questions to a Test.
Upload Questions
Describes the process and file format for uploading questions
to a Test.
Search Pool and
Assessments
Reviews the search function for finding questions.
Categorize
Question
Details how to organize questions into groups.
Category Manager
Describes the feature used to control categories.
Survey Manager
Explains how to create and manage Surveys.
Pool Manager
Describes how to create and manage Pools of questions.
Pool Import
Explains how to import a pool of questions
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 234 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ABOUT ASSESSMENTS
Overview
Instructors use Assessments to test Student knowledge, measure Student progress, and gather
information from Students. When creating an Assessment there are a number of things the
Instructor should consider before creating the Assessment:
•
The structure of the Assessment and the types of questions that will be included
•
Deployment and setting options, such as test presentation and feedback
•
How the Assessment will be graded and the availability of multiple attempts
Assessment Creation
Before creating an Assessment, the Instructor should consider what type of knowledge is being
tested and select question types tailored to the subject matter. For example, on an English test a
series of Short Answer questions may be the best format, while for a Science test a mix of Multiple
Choice, Matching and Fill in the Blank questions would better test Student's knowledge.
It is also helpful to consider flexibility when scoring questions. Will partial credit be acceptable for
some or all questions? Are some questions very difficult and may count as extra credit?
Note that questions on the Test Canvas may be reorganized or re-arranged - so the order in which
questions are added is not too important.
Assessment Deployment and Settings
Before creating an Assessment it is important to ask how the Assessment will be deployed and
what settings will be added. This section discusses some use cases and examples for different
options available.
Note: The deployment and settings for an Assessment are selected on
the Test Options page. This page appears when an Assessment is
added to a Content Area.
practice exercise Instructors may want to make multiple attempts available, or they may decide to
give Students a specific number of available attempts. If it is a practice exercise for a standardized
test, the option for enforce a time limit may be helpful.
Self Assessment options allow the Instructor to determine how the Assessments is treated in the
Gradebook. The Do not include this test in Gradebook score calculations options allows the
Instructor to view the grade, but the score does not count towards the grade. This would allow the
Instructor to see the areas where additional instruction is needed and direct Students towards
specific topics to review. The Hide the score of this test from the Gradebook option encourages
self discovery by students and encourages Students to work on their own.
Options in the Test Presentation section determine how the Test is viewed by Students. There are
different benefits to each option. The All at Once option may be useful for short quizzes, for
example a ten question Multiple Choice quiz. Is an Assessment includes over 25 questions, the
One Question at a Time option should be selected. This option automatically saves the answers
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 235 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
to questions as Students move through the Assessment. Students may focus on one question at a
time and, if necessary, Instructors may enable backtracking, so Students may revisit previously
answered questions.
Grading Assessments
Instructors have a lot of flexibility when grading Assessments. Grading within Blackboard provides
an automated system, but allows for the flexibility of real life scenarios.
When multiple attempts are permitted for an Assessment the Instructor can customize grading; the
option to include the average score may be selected, but if the Instructor changes his or her min,
this may be changed. For example, if the Instructor would like to give Students a bonus this could
be switched so the highest score on the Assessment is included.
The override and clear attempts options are helpful in dealing with real-life scenarios. Clear
attempts allows Instructors to erase a grade from the Gradebook. For example, the Instructor could
give Students a trial run of the Assessment in class; then clear the attempts before they take the
Assessment. Or, if there is a technical failure at the institution, all attempts for the Assessment
taken on that date may be removed. This option also enables the Instructor to allow a Student to
retake a test if the situation arises.
The Override option allows the Instructor to enter a grade that supplants the existing grade or
grades (in the case of multiple attempts) in the Gradebook. For example, in the case of extenuating
circumstances, the Instructor could use Override to make a Student's grade higher or lower. This
score is used when calculating the grade.
Note: Grading is managed in the Gradebook.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 236 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TEST MANAGER
Overview
The Test Manager is used to create, modify, and remove Tests.
Note: Surveys include many of the same features and functions as
Tests. Differences between the two are noted throughout this section.
Surveys are managed through the Survey Manager, which functions
like the Test Manager.
Find this page
Click Test Manager in the Assessment area on the Control Panel to open the Test Manager.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
To . . .
click. . .
create a Test
Add Test. The Test Info page will appear.
modify a Test
Modify next to the Test. The Test Canvas page will appear.
remove a Test
Remove next to the Test. A confirmation box appears.
Removing a Test is irreversible.
export a Test
Export next to the Test. The Export Test page will appear.
Tests may be exported to the local computer or to the
Content Collection.
import a Test
Import. The Test Import page will appear. Tests may be
imported from a local file or from the Content Collection.
Tests must be imported from files that were created in
Blackboard and exported out.
Questions to consider before creating an Assessment
Below are questions to consider when planning an Assessment:
•
How many questions?
•
Are there instructions for this Assessment?
•
What type of questions?
•
What is the point value associated with each question?
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 237 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Warning
A warning will appear if any Students are in the process of taking the Test or have already taken
the Test when Modify is selected. Certain areas of the Test will not be available for modification if
the Test has already been taken by Students.
If the Instructor modifies an Assessment after a Student has submitted it, the Student will view the
new, modified Assessment when they view their grade and feedback. They will not view their
original Assessment attempt.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 238 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
HOW TO CREATE OR MODIFY A TEST
Overview
This topic describes how to create a Test.
Find this page
Click Test Manager in the Assessments area on the Control Panel to open the Test Manager.
How to create a Test
Follow the steps below to create a Test.
1.
Select Add Test on the Test Manager page.
2.
Enter a name, description, instructions and click Submit.
3.
Select a question type on the Test Canvas and click Go.
4.
Create a question.
5.
Enter the Point Value for the question.
6.
Attach a file or URL.
7.
Enter answers to choose from and select the correct answer.
8.
Enter feedback that Students will see based on their answer.
9.
Repeat Step 3 through Step 8 until finished adding questions.
How to make a Test available
Follow the steps below to make a Test available.
1.
Open a course area and select Add Test.
2.
Select the Test to add and click Submit.
3.
Select the Properties, Availability, Feedback, and Presentation options for the Test.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 239 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TEST INFO
Overview
On the Test Info page the Instructor begins creating a test by selecting a name, description, and
instructions.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Test Info page.
1.
Select Test Manager in the area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Test.
1.
Select Test Manager in the area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to an existing Test.
3.
Click Modify in the first section on the Test Canvas.
OR
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Test Info page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Test Info
Name [r]
Enter the name of the Test.
If the Test name is changed after it is created the name of the
test in the Gradebook will not be changed. To change the
name of the Test in the Gradebook as well, edit the Item
Information in the Gradebook.
Description
Enter a description of the Test.
Instructions
Enter instructions for the users taking the Test.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 240 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TEST CANVAS
Overview
The Test Canvas page is the center of the Test creation process. Instructors can modify the Test
name and instructions, add and modify questions on the Test, and view Tests. With the exception
of minor text changes, such as correcting a typo, Assessments should not be modified if Students
have already begun taking the Assessment.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Test Canvas page for an existing test.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to an existing Test.
Follow these steps to open the Test Canvas page for a new test.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Test.
3.
Complete the Add Test page and select Submit.
Functions
The functions available on the Test Canvas page are described in the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add a question
the drop-down menu in the Add Question: field, select a type of
question to add and click Go.
add a question in
between existing
questions
the drop-down menu in the Add Question: field, select a type of
question to add and click Add Question Here in the location
where the question should appear.
change the
settings for this
Test
Creation Settings. The Test Creation Settings page will
appear. Creation Settings enable the Instructor to adjust the
default point value, options for question feedback and the
inclusion of images.
change the name,
description, or
instructions for the
Test
Modify to the right of the Name, Description, and Instructions.
change the order
of the questions
the drop-down list to the left of the question header. Select a
new order for the questions using the numbers in the dropdown list.
Modify to the right of the question header.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 241 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
modify a question
remove a question
Remove to the right of the question header. A confirmation box
will appear. Removing a question is irreversible.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 242 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TEST CREATION SETTINGS
Overview
The Test Creation Settings page allows Instructors to adjust settings for a Test. These settings
control options, such as question feedback, categorization of questions, and default point value.
Note: The Pool Creation Settings page and Survey Creation Settings
page function in the same way as the Test Creation Settings. The
differences are the Specify default point values for questions option is
not available on the Pool Creation Settings page or the Survey Creation
Page. Also, the Add Categories to questions option is not available on
the Survey Creation Settings page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Test Creation Settings page.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Test.
3.
Complete the Add Test page and select Submit.
4.
Select Creation Settings.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Creation Settings
Provide feedback
for individual
answers
Select this check box to include the option to enter feedback for
individual answers rather then just one set of feedback for
correct or incorrect answers.
Individual feedback cannot be provided for answers in
True/False questions, Multiple Answer questions, Ordering and
Matching questions.
Add images, files,
and URLs to
questions
Select this check box to include the option to attach images,
files, and URLs to questions.
Add images and
files to answers
Select this check box to include the option to attach images and
files to answers.
Add categories
and keywords to
questions
Select this check box to include the option to create categories
for questions. This option also enables Instructors to add
keywords to questions. When searching for questions from a
Question Pool or other Tests, Instructors may search for
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 243 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F IELD
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
questions by category and keyword.
Specify default
point value for
questions
Select this option and all questions will automatically have the
same point value. Enter the point value in the Default point
value: field. This only sets a default.
Specify partial
credit options for
answers
Select this option to make partial credit available for questions
included in this Assessment. If selected, an option to give
partial credit appears when questions are created.
Specify extra
credit option for
questions
Select this option to make extra credit available for questions
included in this Assessment. If selected, an extra credit option
appears when each question is created. This option allows the
Instructor to make the questions an extra credit questions as
opposed to a regular question. If this options is selected points
are added to the score if the question is answered correctly; no
points are taken away if the questions is answered incorrectly.
Default Point Value
Instructors must set the Default Point Value before creating questions for it to be effective. If the
default point value is changed, only questions created after it is modified will have the new point
value. Questions created before the modification will have the old point value. For example, set the
Default Point Value to ten then create questions in the Assessment. These questions will have a
point value of ten. Next, change the Default Point Value to 15, and create additional questions in
the Assessment. These new questions will have a point value of 15, but the questions created
initially will still have a point value of ten.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 244 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
QUESTION COMPLETION STATUS
About Question Completion Status
The Questions Status Indicator is a tool to provide users with a quick up-to-date look at their
progress (complete or incomplete questions) in an assessment at all times. The Save button next
to each question provides a visual reminder to Students to save their work periodically.
Completion status of assessment questions is displayed at the top of the page when a student is
taking an assessment. The status of which questions have been answered is displayed at the top
of the page, just below the Name and Instructions box.
When the user answers a question and moves on to the next question in a question-by-question
assessment, the status box will be updated on the next page to show that the previous question
was answered. If the user does not answer a question and moves on to the next page in a question
by question assessment, the status box will show on the next page that the previous question was
not answered. The user can navigate between questions by clicking on the question number in the
status indicator. This is applicable only to assessments deployed all at once or question by
question where backtracking is permitted.
While taking an all-at-once assessment, the user will be able to use a Save button to the right of
each question to save this specific question without scrolling to the bottom of the page to save.
Saving either a single question or all of the questions that have been answered (with the Save
button at the bottom of the page) changes the status indicator to show which questions have been
completed.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 245 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
QUESTION METADATA
Overview
Instructors have the option to create categories, keywords, Learning Objectives, and Levels of
Difficulty for questions to help organize them for future use.
Note: The Question Metadata options are only available if Add
categories and keywords to questions is selected in Creation Settings.
Add Metadata to a Question
Follow these steps to add metadata to a question.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Create a new Test or select Modify next to an existing Test.
3.
Select a new question in the Add Question: field or select Modify next to an existing
question.
4.
Click Categorize to add a category, Set Learning Objective to add a Learning Objective,
or Set Level of Difficulty to add a Level of Difficulty. For Keywords, enter the words,
separated by commas, directly into the Keywords field.
5.
Select a value from the drop-down list and click Add. The metadata will be assigned to the
question. To organize the list of available values, click Manage.
Manage Metadata
Metadata values can be added, removed, and changed. Metadata created in one question can be
used when creating other questions in the same course. Follow these steps to add values for
metadata.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Create a new Test or select Modify next to an existing Test.
3.
Select a new question in the Add Question: field or select Modify next to an existing
question.
4.
Click Manage Categories, Set Learning Objective, or Set Level of Difficulty.
5.
To add a value to the list of available values, enter it in the field and click Add. Available
values appear below. Click Modify to change the name of a value or Remove to delete
the value from the list.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 246 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
About Multiple Choice Questions
Multiple-choice questions allow the users a multitude of choices with only one correct answer. In
multiple-choice questions, users indicate the correct answer by selecting a radio button. The
number of answer choices is limited to 20.
Note: Use the Multiple Answer question type to create multiple choice
questions with more then one answer.
Find this page
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment..
2.
Select Multiple Choice from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value and complete the partial credit options if necessary.
5.
Select the number of answers and complete the answer options.
6.
Complete any advanced features for the questions as defined by the Creation Settings of
the assessment.
7.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 247 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TRUE/FALSE QUESTIONS
About True/False Questions
True/False questions allow the user to choose either true or false. True and False answer options
are limited to the words True and False.
Create a True/False question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select True/False from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text. This should be in the form of a statement that users will mark
either True or False.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Select the Answer Orientation and correct answer for the question.
6.
Complete any advanced features for the questions as defined by the Creation Settings of
the assessment.
7.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 248 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
About Multiple Choice Questions
Multiple-choice questions allow the users a multitude of choices with only one correct answer. In
multiple-choice questions, users indicate the correct answer by selecting a radio button. The
number of answer choices is limited to 20.
Note: Use the Multiple Answer question type to create multiple choice
questions with more then one answer.
Find this page
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment..
2.
Select Multiple Choice from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value and complete the partial credit options if necessary.
5.
Select the number of answers and complete the answer options.
6.
Complete any advanced features for the questions as defined by the Creation Settings of
the assessment.
7.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 249 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
FILL IN THE BLANK QUESTIONS
About Fill in the Blank Questions
Fill in the Blank answers are evaluated based on an exact text match. Accordingly, it is important to
keep the answers simple and limited to as few words as possible. Answers are not case sensitive,
but are evaluated based on spelling. Consider the following tips when creating Fill in the Blank
questions and answers:
•
Provide answers that allow for common spelling errors.
•
Provide answers that allow for abbreviations or partial answers.
•
Create the question that indicates to Students the best way to answer the question.
•
Phrase the question so there is only one answer
Try to keep answers limited to one word to avoid mismatched answers due to extra spaces or order
of answer terms. If the answer may be more then one word, list all possibilities as answers. For
example, if Benjamin Franklin is the answer, include Benjamin Franklin, Franklin, and Ben Franklin
as correct answers.
Note: Use the Fill in Multiple Blanks question type to create a question
with multiple answers.
Create a Fill in the Blank Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Fill in the Blank from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text and assign a Point Value.
4.
Enter all of the possible answers to the question.
5.
Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the Creation Settings of
the assessment.
6.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 250 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
About Multiple Answer Questions
Multiple answer questions allow users to choose more than one answer. The number of answer
choices is limited to 20. This type of question may be used when more then one answer is correct;
users can select the incorrect answers. For example, in the medical field, this type of question may
be used to select symptoms associated with a medical condition.
Create a Multiple Answer Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Multiple Answer from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text and assign a Point Value.
4.
Select options for how answers are displayed. This includes:
•
Answer Numbering - determines how the answers are numbered
•
Answer orientation - determines if answers appear vertically or horizontally
•
Allow Partial Credit - select if partially correct answers receive any credit
•
Show Answers in Random Order - displays answers in a random order
when users take the assessment
5.
Enter the number of answers and complete the text box for each answer. Indicate the
correct answers by selecting the check box to the left of the question.
6.
Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the Creation Settings of
the assessment.
7.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 251 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MATCHING QUESTIONS
About Matching Questions
Matching questions allow Students to pair items in one column to items in another column.
Instructors may include a different numbers of questions and answers in a Matching question. For
example, the question may include a list of animals and a list of food they eat (herbivore, carnivore,
omnivore). The users would match each animal with their diet.
Students will be granted partial credit for matching questions if they answer part of the question
correctly. For example, if the question is worth eight points and the student gives the correct
answers for half of the matches, they will receive four points.
Create a Matching Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Matching Question from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text and assign a Point Value.
4.
Select options for question layout and partial credit.
5.
Select the number of questions and enter the text for each question. The number of
questions and answers may be uneven. For example, the Instructor may include extra
answers to make the question more difficult.
6.
Select the number of answers and enter the text for each answer. Click Next.
7.
Match each Question with the correct Answer.
8.
Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the Creation Settings of
the Assessment.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 252 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ORDERING QUESTIONS
Overview
Ordering questions require users to provide an answer by selecting the correct order of a series of
items. For example, an Instructor may give users a list of historical events and ask them to place
these events in chronological order.
Users will be granted partial credit for ordering questions if they answer part of the question
correctly. For example, if the question is worth eight points and the student gives the correct order
for half of the items, they will receive four points.
Create an Ordering Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Ordering Question from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text and assign a Point Value.
4.
Select options for numbering and partial credit.
5.
Select the number of answers and enter them in the correct order. Click Next.
6.
Select the order in which to display the answers.
7.
Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the Creation Settings of
the Assessment.
8.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 253 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ESSAY QUESTIONS
Overview
Essay questions require the Instructor to provide Students with a question or statement. Students
are given the opportunity to type an answer into a text field. Sample answers can be added for
users or graders to use as a reference. These types of questions must be graded manually on the
Grade Assessment page. Essay questions may use the Math and Science Notation Tool.
Note: A Short Answer Question type is also available; this question type
allows the instructor to limit the length of the response. Like Essay
questions; Short Answer Questions are manually graded.
Other Question types that allow user input are File Response, Fill in the
Blank, and Fill in Multiple Blank.
Create an Essay Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Essay Question from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text and assign a Point Value.
4.
Enter a sample answer for users to view with the question.
5.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 254 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CALCULATED FORMULA QUESTIONS
About Calculated Formula Questions
A Calculated Formula question contains a formula, the variables of which can be set to change for
each user. The variable range is created by specifying a minimum value and a maximum value for
each variable. Answer sets are randomly generated. The correct answer can be a specific value or
a range of values. Partial credit may be granted for answers falling in a range.
Since this question allows the Instructor to randomize the value of variables in an equation it may
be useful when creating math drills to when giving a test when Students are seated close together.
Adding a calculated question to an Assessment is a three step process:
•
Create the question and formula.
•
Define the values for the variables.
•
Confirm the variables and answers.
Create the Question and Formula
The question is the information presented to students. The formula is the mathematical expression
used to find the answer. Be sure to enclose variables in square brackets.
Follow these steps to create the question and formula:
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Calculated Formula from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the information that will display to Students in the Question Text box. Surround any
variables with square brackets, for example, [x]. The value for this variable will be
populated based on the formula. In the example [x] + [y] = z, [x] and [y] will be replaced
by values when shown to Students. Students would be asked to define z.
Variables should be composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and
hyphens (-). All other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should
be preceded by the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and cannot
be reused.
4.
Define the formula used to answer the question in the Formula box. For example, x + y.
Operations are chosen from the buttons across the top of the Formula box.
5.
Assign a point value for the question. Several other options may appear based on the
Creation Settings.
6.
Set the Answer Range. This defines which submitted answers will be marked correct. If
the exact value must be entered, enter 0 and select Numeric from the drop-down list. If
the answer can vary, enter a value and select Numeric or Percent. Numeric will mark
every answer as correct that falls within a range of plus or minus the Answer Range from
the exact answer. Percent will mark every answer as correct that falls within a percentage
of plus or minus the Answer Range from the exact answer.
7.
Select Yes or No for Units Required. If Yes, correct answers must include the correct
unit of measurement, for example, Seconds or Grams. Enter the correct unit of
measurement and choose if the unit of measurement is case sensitive. The answer may
still receive partial credit if the unit of measurement is not correct. Enter a percentage in
Unit Points Percentage. The unit of measurement will account for that percentage of the
total credit.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 255 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
8.
Define partial credit for answers that fall outside the correct Answer Range. Select Yes or
No for Allow Partial Credit. Enter a value for the Partial Credit Points Percentage.
Now, set the range for partial credit by entering a value and selecting Numeric or Percent
for the Partial Credit Range. Answers falling within this range will receive a portion of the
total points possible for the question equal to the Partial Credit Points Percentage.
9.
When finished with the question, click Continue to proceed.
Define the Variables
The next page in the three step process defines the variables in the formula. Follow these steps to
define the variables.
1.
For each variable, set a minimum and a maximum value.
2.
For each variable, select a decimal place using the drop-down list that appears in the
Decimal Places column.
3.
Under Answer Set Options, select the Decimal places for answer from the drop-down
list. Users must provide the correct answer to this decimal place.
4.
Enter the number of different Answer Sets. The Answer Sets will be randomized so that
different Students will be presented with a different set of variables.
5.
Click Continue to proceed. Or, Click Back to return to the previous page or click Calculate
to reset the variables after making a change.
Confirm the Variables and Answers
The last step in the process displays the Answer Sets in a table. For each set, each variable and
the answer are displayed. Make any changes or remove any unwanted answer sets and click
Calculate.
Below the Answer Sets are the standard options for adding feedback and metadata to questions.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 256 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CALCULATED NUMERIC RESPONSE QUESTIONS
About Calculated Numeric Response Questions
This question resembles a fill-in-the-blank question. The user enters a number to complete a
statement. The correct answer can be a specific number or within a range of numbers. Please note
that the answer must be numeric, not alphanumeric. For example, in a Geography class the
Instructor may ask for the estimated population of a specific city.
Create a Calculated Numeric Response Question
Follow these steps to create a Numeric Response question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Numeric from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value. Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the
Creation Settings of the assessment.
5.
Enter the Correct Answer. This value must be a number.
6.
Enter the Answer Range. If the answer must be exact for Students to receive credit, enter
0. Any value that is less than or more than the Correct Answer by less than the Answer
Range value will be marked as correct.
7.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question metadata.
8.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 257 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
FILE RESPONSE QUESTIONS
About File Response Questions
Users upload a file from the local drive or from the Content Collection as the answer to the
question. This type of question is graded manually. This question type is a good option if the
Instructor would like Students to work on something before a test and submit it with a test, or if the
response to the questions is expected to take a long time to read. Submitting the answer this way
allows the Instructor to read and grade the question without worrying that the browser will time out.
Note: Short Answer and Essay questions may also be used for
questions that may require a shorter answer from a Student. These
questions types must also be manually graded.
Other Question types that allow user input are File Response, Fill in the
Blank, and Fill in Multiple Blank.
Create a File Response Question
Follow these steps to create a File Response question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select File Response from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value. Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the
Creation Settings of the assessment.
5.
Assign the question any metadata.
6.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 258 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
HOT SPOT QUESTIONS
About Hot Spot Questions
Users indicate the answer by marking a specific point on an image. A range of pixel coordinates is
used to define the correct answer. Hot Spot refers to the area of an image that, when selected,
yields a correct answer. The following are some examples of uses for this type of question:
•
Anatomy - to locate different parts of the body
•
Geography - to locate areas on a map
•
Foreign Language - to select different articles of clothing
Create a Hot Spot Question
Follow these steps to create a Hot Spot question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Hot Spot from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value. Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the
Creation Settings of the assessment.
5.
Enter the path to the file in the Attach Local File field under the Upload Image heading.
Make sure to upload the image in the correct field. Remember that Creation Settings
allows uploading a file as part of the Question Text.
6.
Click Next. The uploaded image will appear.
7.
Click the mouse and drag it to create a rectangle over the correct answer. When Students
select a point within the rectangle they will receive credit for a correct answer. The area of
the hot spot is defined by pixels. Click Clear to remove the hot spot and select a new hot
spot.
8.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question a category or other metadata.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 259 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
FILL IN MULTIPLE BLANKS QUESTIONS
About Fill In Multiple Blanks Questions
This question type builds on fill-in-the-blank questions with multiple fill in the blank responses that
can be inserted into a sentence or paragraph. Separate sets of answers are defined for each blank.
This question type may be used if there are multiple variables, such as "What color is the Italian
flag?" This question type is also useful in foreign language classes. In this case the identifier and
adjective may be left blank in a sentence, so as not to give away the gender of an object.
Create a Multiple Fill-in-the-Blanks Question
Follow these steps to create a Fill In Multiple Blanks question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Fill In Multiple Blanks from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text. Enter each blank as a variable surrounded by square brackets.
For example, William [blank_1] wrote Romeo and [blank_2].
Variables should be composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and
hyphens (-). All other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should
be preceded by the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and cannot
be reused.
4.
Assign a Point Value. Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the
Creation Settings of the assessment.
5.
Click Next.
6.
A list of variables found in the question will appear. Enter one or more correct answers for
each variable.
7.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question a category or other metadata.
8.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 260 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
JUMBLED SENTENCE QUESTIONS
About Jumbled Sentence Questions
Users are shown a sentence with a few parts of the sentence as variables. The user selects the
proper answer for each variable from drop-down lists to assemble the sentence. Only one set of
answers is used for all of the drop-down lists. This type of question may be useful when teaching
about proper grammatical order in a sentence, such as the location of a noun, verb, or adjective,
Create a Jumbled Sentence Question
Follow these steps to create a Jumbled Sentence question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Jumbled Sentence from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text. Enter each blank as a variable surrounded by square brackets.
Variables should be composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and
hyphens (-). All other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should
be preceded by the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and cannot
be reused.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Select the Number of Answers and enter a value for each. These values will appear in a
drop-down list for each variable when users view the question. Enter the answers in the
order they should display to Students in the drop-down.
6.
Click Next.
7.
The question will appear with the drop-down lists in place of the variables. Select the
correct answers.
8.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question a category or other metadata.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 261 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
OPINION SCALE/LIKERT QUESTIONS
About Opinion Scale/Likert Questions
Question type based on a rating scale designed to measure attitudes or reactions. This type of
question is popular to use in surveys in order to get a comparable scale of opinion. Users indicate
the multiple choice answer that represents their attitude or reaction. When the instructor creates an
opinion scale question, six answer fields are pre-populated with the following answers:
•
Strongly Agree
•
Agree
•
Neither Agree nor Disagree
•
Disagree
•
Strongly Disagree
•
Not Applicable
Create an Opinion Scale/Likert Question
Follow these steps to create an Opinion Scale/Likert question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Opinion Scale from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Determine how the answers will be displayed by selecting Answer Numbering and
Answer Orientation.
6.
Check Allow Partial Credit and options will appear under each answer to assign a
percentage of points possible.
7.
The Answer fields are pre-populated with values on a Likert scale. Select a correct answer
and change any of the answer values.
8.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign question metadata.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 262 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS
About Short Answer Questions
Short Answer questions are similar to essay questions. The length of the answer can be limited to a
specified number of rows in the text box. Essay questions, Short Answer questions must be
graded manually.
The number of rows is meant as a guideline when entering an answer, it does not impose an
absolute limit on answer length.
Create a Short Answer Question
Follow these steps to create a short response question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Short Answer from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Select a number of rows for the answer.
6.
Enter an example of a correct answer to assist Graders.
7.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign question metadata.
8.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 263 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
EITHER/OR QUESTIONS
About Either/Or Questions
Users are presented with a statement and asked to respond using a selection of pre-defined twochoice answers, such as:
•
Yes/No
•
Agree/Disagree
•
Right/Wrong
This question type is very useful in Surveys to gage user's opinions. It is a slight variation on the
True/False question type, except more descriptive and meaningful answers may be used.
Create an Either/Or Question
Follow these steps to create an Either/Or question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Either/Or from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Click the Correct Answer and select a positive value and a negative value from the dropdown lists.
6.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question metadata.
7.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 264 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
QUIZ BOWL QUESTIONS
About Quiz Bowl Questions
Quiz Bowl questions are a way to add fun and creativity to tests, such as self assessments or inclass contests. The user is shown the answer and responds by entering the correct question into a
text box. An answer must include a phrase and a question word, such as who, what, or where, to
be marked as correct. For example, the question may be "The person who invented the cotton gin",
with the answer being "Who is Eli Whitney?" Partial credit may be given if the question word is not
included in the answer.
Create a Quiz Bowl Question
Follow these steps to create a Quiz Bowl question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Quiz Bowl from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Click the Allow Partial Credit and enter a percentage of credit. This is the amount of
credit that will be given to answers that include the correct phrase but do not include the
correct interrogative word.
6.
Select the Number of Interrogative Words. Enter each acceptable interrogative word in
the fields below. One of these words must appear in the response for the Student to
receive full credit.
7.
Select the Number of Answer Phrases. Enter each acceptable phrase into the fields
below. One of these phrases must appear in the response for the Student to receive any
credit.
8.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign question metadata.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 265 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD/MODIFY RANDOM BLOCK
Overview
Random Blocks enable the Instructor to use a random selection of questions from a Pool. Be aware
that it is not possible to add a Random Block of questions from another Test or Survey.
Note: Random Blocks cannot be included in a Survey or a Pool.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Search
Search the pools
below:
Select a Pool from which to draw the group of questions.
Choose question
types to import
Select the check boxes next the question types to choose
which to include in the Random Block. If All is selected no other
options can be selected. If All is not selected one or more
options may be chosen.
Number of
questions to
import
Enter the number of questions to include in the Random Block.
Points per
question
Enter the number of points each question in the Random Block
will be worth.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 266 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
UPLOAD QUESTIONS
Overview
Instructors may import files containing questions into an Assessment.
The questions in the uploaded file must match the file structure explained below. The file may
include Essay, Ordering, Matching, Fill in the Blank, Multiple Choice, Multiple Answer, and
True/False questions.
Note: Files with questions may be imported into Pools and Surveys.
When uploaded to a Survey, the correct/incorrect answer assignment is
ignored, but the file must follow the same format as described for Tests
and Pools.
Please note that this feature is not available in Blackboard Learning System – Basic Edition.
The following information is important to note when importing Assessment questions:
•
Once uploaded, questions can be manipulated like other questions created within the
Assessment.
•
If there is an error in a question within a file, only the question with an error will fail to
upload. Questions without errors will upload successfully.
•
The system does not check for duplicate questions. It is up to the Instructor to manage
this aspect of the Assessment questions.
Find this page
Select Upload Questions from the Test Canvas.
Function
Click Browse and locate the file that is to be uploaded to this Assessment. All of the questions in
this file will be added to the Assessment.
Point Value
When questions are imported they automatically default to the point value set in Creation Settings.
If a default value has not been chosen in Creation Settings questions will automatically have a point
value of ‘0’ and Instructors must then enter a point value for each question.
File Structure
Questions in the file must conform to a specific structure to be uploaded to an Assessment
successfully. Each field in the file is separated by a tab. Each row is a separate question.
Multiple Choice questions are structured as follows:
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 267 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
‘MC’ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB ‘correct’ or ‘incorrect’)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Multiple Choice
question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
Multiple Answer questions are structured as follows:
‘MA’ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB ‘correct’ or ‘incorrect’)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Multiple Answer
question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
True/False questions are structured as follows:
‘TF’ TAB question text TAB ‘true’ or ‘false’
Essay questions are structured as follows:
‘ESS’ TAB question text TAB [example]
Text within [ ] is optional. The Instructor may choose to add a sample essay question or leave this
blank.
Ordering questions are structured as follows:
‘ORD’ TAB question text (TAB answer text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Ordering question. The
maximum number of answers is 20.
The order entered in the file is the correct order. The system will randomly order the answers.
Matching questions are structured as follows:
‘MAT’ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB matching text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Matching question. The
maximum number of answers is 20.
The system will randomly order the answers and their question.
When uploading a matching question, there must be a one-to-one relationship between questions
and answers. If not, correct answers may be marked incorrect if more than one answer has the
same value.
Fill in the Blank questions are structured as follows:
‘FIB’ TAB question text (TAB answer text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Fill in the Blank
question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
File Response questions are structured as follows:
'FIL' TAB question
Numeric Response questions are structured as follows:
'NUM' TAB question TAB answer TAB [optional]tolerance
Short Response questions are structured as follows:
'SR' TAB question TAB sample_answer
Opinion/Likert Scale questions are structured as follows:
OP TAB question
Multiple Fill-in-the-Blank questions are structured as follows:
FIB_PLUS TAB question TAB variable1 TAB answer1 TAB answer2 TAB variable2 TAB answer3
The format consists of a list of variable-answers where each variable- answer
is composed of the variable name and a list of correct answers for that
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 268 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
variable. variable-answers are delimited by an empty field.
Jumbled Sentence questions are structured as follows:
JUMBLED_SENTENCE TAB question TAB choice1 TAB variable1 TAB choice2 TAB TAB
choice3 TAB variable2
The format consists of a list of choices-answers where each choice-answer consists of the choice
followed by the list of variables for which that choice is the correct answer. An empty field indicates
the end of a choice answer. A choice immediately followed by an empty field indicates that that
choice is not the correct answer for any variable.
Quiz Bowl questions are structured as follows:
QUIZ_BOWL TAB question TAB question_word1 TAB question_word2 TAB phrase1 TAB
phrase2
The format consists of a list of valid question words followed by an empty field and a list of valid
answer phrases.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 269 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SEARCH POOLS AND ASSESSMENTS
Overview
This section discusses how to select specific questions from Pools and other Assessments.
Instructors may choose questions based on category, keyword and question type.
Find this page
Click Search Pools and Assessments for a question from the Test Canvas page.
Field
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Search the pools
and assessments
below
Select a Test or question Pool from which to select the
questions.
Question Types
Select All to choose questions from all question types or select
one or more question types.
Related
Categories
Select a category to choose questions from. This option is on
the Advanced tab.
Keywords
Enter keywords to search for questions. When entering more
then one keyword, insert a comma between keywords. If more
than one keyword is entered, only questions that have all of the
keywords will be retrieved. This option is on the Advanced tab.
Points
Once questions from a Pool are imported to a Test a point value must be assigned. If a default
point value has been set in Test Creation Settings the imported questions will automatically be set
to the default.
Choose Questions
Select one or more questions to include on the Test. Click Preview to view the question as it will
appear on the Test.
Instructors may select 20 questions at a time from a Pool or another Assessment to add to a Test.
When the search is performed 20 questions will appear on a page, if more the 20 questions are
found during the search, multiple pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and submit
questions from one page at a time. For example, if the search returns three pages of questions,
the Instructor must select the questions to add on the first page and click Submit, then proceed to
the second page of the search, select questions on that page and select Submit, and so on until
finished.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 270 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SURVEY MANAGER
Overview
Surveys provide Instructors with an Assessment tool that is useful for polling purposes, evaluations,
and random checks of knowledge. The Survey Manager is used to create, add, preview, modify,
and remove Surveys.
Find this page
To open the Survey Manager, click Survey Manager in the Assessment Area on the Control Panel.
Functions
The Survey Manager functions in the same way as the Test Manager and offers most of the same
options for creating and managing Surveys, Survey questions and settings.
Surveys differ from Tests in the following ways:
•
Questions on Surveys cannot be assigned points.
•
Surveys cannot include Random Blocks of questions.
•
Instructors cannot give Students feedback.
•
Surveys cannot be graded.
•
Survey questions cannot be categorized.
•
Questions may be imported into a Survey. Questions that are imported into a Survey may
not include correct and incorrect answers.
Survey Creation Settings
The Survey Creation Settings function in the same way as the Test Creation Settings. The only
difference is there are not options to Add categories to questions or to Specify default point
values for questions.
Survey Results
Instructors may view the results of Surveys on the Assessment Stats page. This page will show
how Students responded to questions on the Survey by percentage.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 271 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
POOL MANAGER
Overview
The Pool Manager allows Instructors to store questions for repeated use. Instructors can create
new questions to include in Pools and add questions that have been created in other Tests or
Pools. Pools from other courses can be imported through the Pool Manager. With the exception of
minor text changes, such as correcting a typo, a Pool should not be modified if Students have
already begun taking an Assessment that draws questions from the Pool.
Note: When creating question Pools for Surveys, Instructors must add
correct answers, as if they were creating Test questions. These
answers will be ignored once the question is copied into a Survey.
Find this page
Click Pool Manager in Assessments on the Control Panel to open the Pool Manager page.
Functions
The Pool Manager functions in the same way as the Test Manager and offers all of the same
options for creating and managing Pools. The difference between Pools and Tests is that Tests can
be added to Course areas for users to view and complete. Pools contain questions that can be
included in a Test. Pool questions cannot be presented to Students unless they are included in a
Test.
Pools also differ from Tests in the following ways:
•
Random Blocks cannot be added to Pools.
•
Pool questions do not have point values associated with them. When a Pool question is
added to a Test the Instructor can assign a point value.
•
A file of Pool questions may be imported from the Pool Manager page by selecting
Import.
•
A file of Pool questions may be exported from the Pool Manager page by selecting
Export. The exported Pool will be packaged in a .zip file. Once a pool is exported
questions may not be added to it.
Pool Creation Settings
The Pool Creation Settings function in the same way as the Test Creation Settings. The only
difference is there is not an option to Specify default point values for questions. Pool questions
are not associated with a point value until they are added to a Test.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 272 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Warning
When questions are selected from a Pool to be included in a Test links are created between the
Test and the Pool for those questions. Instructors should not make changes to Pool questions that
have been deployed in a Test once Students have begun taking the Test. A warning will appear if
any Students are in the process of taking the Test or have already taken the Test when Modify is
selected on the Pool Manager. Certain areas of the questions will not be available for modification if
the Test has already been taken by Students.
If the Instructor modifies a Pool question after a Student has submitted a Test it was included on,
the Student will view the new, modified question when they view their grade and feedback. They
will not view the original question.
Export Pool
A Question Pool may be exported by selecting Export on the Pool Manager page. The exported
Pool is packaged in a .ZIP file. Once a pool is exported, questions may not be added to it.
Instructors can choose to export a Question Pool to their local computer or to the Blackboard
Content System (if it is available). If the Blackboard Content System is not available, selecting to
Export a pool prompts the Instructor to store the pool on their local computer.
If Instructors select to export the pool to the Blackboard Content System,
they must enter a destination by either typing a valid path or by selecting
Browse. If Browse is selected, the Blackboard Content System will open in a
new window. Instructors may select any folder on which they have Write
permission. It is not possible to export a pool to an existing file; therefore,
only folders inside the Blackboard Content System can be selected. If an
Instructor manually enters a Blackboard Content System path without Write
permission on that path, an error message appears. In addition, if exporting
a pool exceeds the quota of the destination path, an error message appears
and the export does not occur.
Note: Blackboard Content System Destination paths that are manually
entered are case-sensitive.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 273 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
POOL IMPORT
Overview
Instructors may import a Pool of questions for use in Tests. Pools are exported from the
Blackboard Learning System and imported as .ZIP packages.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Pool Import page.
1.
Select Pool Manager in Assessments on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Import in the Action Bar.
Field
Instructors may import a pool from either their local computer or from the Blackboard Content
System, if it is available. Instructors may manually enter a path in either the Attach local file field
or in the Copy file from Content System field. Alternatively, Instructors may select the Browse
button next to a field to select the appropriate location of the package file. If the Instructor enters
both a local path and a Blackboard Content System path, an error message appears.
If the Instructor selects Browse next to Copy file from Content System, the
Blackboard Content System opens in a new window. Select the appropriate
package file, and click Submit. Folders cannot be selected, and only files on
which the Instructor has Read permission will be appear.
GRADEBOOK
Overview
Instructors record and manage all Student grades in the Gradebook.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Gradebook
Describes how the Gradebook manages all aspects of Student
grades.
Add/Modify
Gradebook Item
Provides instructions for creating and changing Gradebook
items.
Manage Items
Details the options available for Gradebook Items.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 274 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Spreadsheet
Settings
Describes the options for viewing the Gradebook.
Manage
Categories
Explains how to organize Gradebook Items into groups.
Create/Modify Item
Category
Provides instructions for creating and changing Gradebook
Item categories.
Manage Display
Options
Describes the settings for controlling what information is
displayed in the Gradebook.
Create/Modify
Grade Display
Options
Describes the settings for displaying individual grades.
Weigh Grades
Explains how Gradebook Items can be given more or less
importance when calculating the final grade.
Calculating Total
and Weighted
Total in the
Gradebook
Describes how grades are calculated and the options for
displaying final grades to users.
Download
Gradebook
Provides instructions for downloading the Gradebook.
Upload Gradebook
Provides instructions for uploading the Gradebook.
Choose Column to
Import: Items
Explains the option to import only certain Gradebook Items.
Choose Column to
Import: Students
Explains the option to import data about specific Students.
Modify Grade:
Assessment
Explains how to change the grade of an Assessment.
Grade Assessment
Provides instructions for reviewing and manually grading
Assessment questions.
Item Options:
Tests and Surveys
Reviews the Gradebook settings associated with Assessments.
View Item Grades
Provides instructions for viewing Student Grades for an item.
View Item Detail
Provides instructions for viewing detailed results.
Assessment Stats
Provides instructions for viewing detailed statistics about
Assessment results.
Download
Assessment
Results
Provides instructions for downloading the results of an
Assessment for statistical analysis.
Modify Grades:
Assignment
Explains how to change the grade for an Assignment.
Grade Assignment
Explains how to review and assign a grade to an Assigment
submission.
Item Options:
Describes the page that displays links for managing and
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 275 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Assignments
grading Assignments.
Download
Assignment
Provides instructions for downloading an Assignment
submission.
Delete Assignment
Files
Provides instructions for deleting Assignment submissions.
User Options
Reviews the page that displays links with more information
about a user.
View User
Information
Reviews the page that shows personal information about the
user.
View User Grades
Reviews the page that shows all the grades for a user.
View User Detail
Reviews the page that shows performance statistics for an
individual user.
Gradebook Views
Explains the different Gradebook Views available to Instructors.
View Grades by
Gradebook Item
Details a Gradebook view that shows Gradebook Items.
Grades can be viewed for individual items.
View Grades by
User
Details a Gradebook view that shows users in a course.
Grades can be viewed for individual users.
Course Statistics
Explains how to generate reports on the course usage and
activity.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 276 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
GRADEBOOK
Overview
The Gradebook posts all Student grades associated with Tests and Assignments. The Gradebook
also accommodates scores grades for work completed outside of the Blackboard Learning System.
Instructors may also view the results of Surveys through the Gradebook.
The Gradebook opens to the View Spreadsheet page. The Spreadsheet lists Students in rows and
graded items in columns. All features of the Gradebook can be accessed through the Spreadsheet.
Items in the Gradebook are categorized. This enables Instructors to:
•
sort and filter items by category. For example, Instructors may only want to view items in
the Exam category on the View Spreadsheet page.
•
weight categories differently. For example, items in a Homework category may be
weighted less than items in an Exam category.
Note: Assessments that are not available to Students do not appear in
the Gradebook.
Find this page
Click Gradebook in the Assessment area on the Control Panel to open the Gradebook.
Functions
The following functions are available from the View Spreadsheet page.
TO . . .
CLICK
add a Gradebook item
Add Item. The Modify Grade page will appear.
manage items
Manage Items. The Manage Items page will appear.
change Spreadsheet
display and options
Gradebook Settings. The Gradebook Settings page will
appear.
manage grade
weighting
Weight Grades. The Weight Grades page will appear.
download grades
Download Grades. The Download Gradebook page will
appear.
upload grades
Upload Grades. The Upload Gradebook page will appear.
modify a grade
the grade that needs to be modified. The View Grades
page will appear.
view and modify the
details for an
Assessment
the Assessment Name. The Item Options page will
appear.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 277 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TO . . .
CLICK
...
view and modify the
details for an
Assignment
the Assignment Name. The Item Options page will
appear.
view statistics for a user
the user’s name. The User Options page will appear.
sort items
an option in the Sort Item by: drop-down list to sort the
items by:
•
Category
•
Date Added
•
Position
•
Title
Click Go.
view a specific category
of Gradebook items
an option in the Filter Items by Category: drop-down list,
then click Go. Only items that match that type will appear
in the Spreadsheet View.
Gradebook legend
Every Student has a value for every Gradebook item. If the value is not a representation of the
grade, it will be one of the following symbols:
•
Padlock: In Progress. A Student is currently using the Assessment or Assignment.
•
Dash: No Information. A Student has not taken the Assessment or submitted the
Assignment.
•
Exclamation Point: Needs Grading. The item has been submitted by the Student and
needs to be reviewed by the Instructor. Tests that include Essay questions will have this
symbol when they are submitted.
•
Question Mark: Gradebook Error.
•
Checkmark: Item has been completed by the Student.
•
Asterisk: Item is not visible.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 278 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD/MODIFY GRADEBOOK ITEM
Overview
Gradebook Items may be added or modified from the Modify Gradebook Item page. Instructors
may add items and grades to the Gradebook for work that has been done outside the Blackboard
Learning System. For example, if Students manually hand in a project, the Instructor may add the
Item and all of the grades for the project to the Gradebook.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Modify Gradebook Item page.
1.
Select Gradebook in Assessments on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Item.
OR
3.
Select Gradebook in Assessments on the Control Panel.
4.
Select the name of a Gradebook Item.
5.
Click Item Information on the Item Options page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Modify Gradebook Item page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Item Information
Item Name [r]
Enter a title for the new Gradebook item.
When editing an Assignment or Assessment created in the
course, be aware that changing the Item Name will only change
the Item Name in the Gradebook. It must also be changed in
the course area where the item appears if Students are to see
the new name.
Category
Select a category, such as Homework or Quiz, from the dropdown list.
Description
Enter a description of the Gradebook Item.
Due Date
Select a date for the Gradebook Item from the drop-down list or
click the Calendar icon and choose a date. This date can be
used with the Early Warning System to generate an alert if an
Assignment or Assessment is not submitted by the due date.
Points Possible
Enter the maximum number of points possible for this item.
Display As
Select how the grade should be displayed from the drop-down
list.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 279 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Score attempts
using
Select the score that is used in the Gradebook for this
Assessment.
Options
Make item visible
to Students
Select Yes to allow Students to view the item.
Include item in
Gradebook score
calculations
Select Yes and this item will be included in Gradebook
calculations. Select No and this item will not be included in
calculating the Total column.
Comments
Instructors can add comments to each Graded Attempt. Comments are viewed by Students when
they review their grades. Click Comments from the Modify Grade page to add or edit a comment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 280 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANUAL GRADES
Overview
Instructors can add and manage gradebook items even if the work is not completed and reviewed
within the course. Entering a grade for work done outside of the Blackboard Academic Suite
requires the instructor to manually create the gradebook item and manually assign grades for each
student.
Create a Gradebook Item
Follow these steps to create a gradebook item manually.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Item.
3.
The Add Gradebook Item page will appear.
4.
Enter the necessary information about the item and click Submit. Use the table below as
a guide.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Item Information
Item Name [r]
Enter a title for the new Gradebook item.
Category
Select a category, such as Homework or Quiz, from the dropdown list.
Description
Enter a description of the Gradebook Item.
Date
Select a date for the Gradebook Item from the drop-down list or
click the Calendar icon and choose a date.
Points Possible
Enter the maximum number of points possible for this item.
Display As
Select how the grade should be displayed from the drop-down
list.
Score attempts
using
Select the score that is used in the Gradebook for this Item.
Options
Make item visible
to Students
Select Yes to allow Students to view the item.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 281 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Include item in
Gradebook score
calculations
Select Yes and this item will be included in Gradebook
calculations. Select No and this item will not be included in
calculating the Total column, however, the item's weight will still
be used in calculations for the weighted total.
Only select No if the item will never be used to calculate
student grades. In many situations, the instructor will want to
include the grade but is unsure of the weight to give the grade
until the class is farther along in the term. If this is the case,
select Yes and modify the weight of the grade throughout the
term using the Weight Grades feature.
Enter a Grade for a manually created Gradebook Item
Follow these steps to enter a grade for student work outside of the Blackboard Academic Suite.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a cell on the spreadsheet for the student and the Gradebook Item.
3.
The Modify Grade page will appear, listing information about the student and the
gradebook item. Use the Manual Grade field to enter the grade. Note that there
is an Override field on this page as well. Enter a value in the Override field and
that value will be displayed as the grade for the item. Instructors may find it
useful to store a grade in the Manual Grade field and later replace it (but not
remove a record of the original score) by entering a new grade in the Override
field. The grade that is used for calculations and shown to the Student is always
the grade in the Current Grade field.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 282 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANAGE ITEMS
Overview
The Manage Items page allows the Instructor to modify Gradebook items and select the order for
them to appear in the Gradebook.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Items page.
1.
Select Gradebook in Assessments on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage Items.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Manage Items page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
set the order for
items to be listed
on the View
Spreadsheet page
the drop-down list next to each item name and select the order
for them to appear.
modify the
Gradebook item
Modify. The Modify Gradebook Item page will appear.
remove a
Gradebook item
Remove. A warning will appear. Removing a Gradebook item is
irreversible.
Add a Gradebook
item
Add Item. The Modify Gradebook Item page will appear.
Remove items
Items that have been uploaded to the Gradebook, or input directly into the Gradebook, may be
removed from this page. Items that have been created in the Blackboard Learning System (Tests,
Surveys, and Assignments) must be removed from the area where they were created. For
example, a Test created in the Blackboard Learning System, must be removed from the Test
Manager.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 283 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
SPREADSHEET SETTINGS
Overview
Instructors use the Spreadsheet Settings page to adjust the Student information that displays in the
Gradebook.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Spreadsheet Settings page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Spreadsheet Settings.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Spreadsheet Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Options
Student Name,
Last Name, First
Name
Select this check box to display the Student names with the last
names before the first names.
Student Name,
First Name, Last
Name
Select this check box to display the Student names with the first
names before the last names.
User ID
Select this check box to display the Usernames on the
spreadsheet.
Student ID
Select this check box to display the Student IDs on the
spreadsheet.
Note: More then one check box may be selected. For example, the
Instructor may choose to include both the Student Name and the
Username on the spreadsheet. Hold Control to select more then one
option. Also, keep in mind that the filter on the Spreadsheet will
continue to filter by last name even if users’ last names are not
displayed.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 284 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANAGE CATEGORIES
Overview
The Manage Gradebook Categories page displays categories and category descriptions that are
included in the Gradebook. Instructors may create new Gradebook categories. Categories can be
used in weighting grades. For example, items in the Exam Category may have a greater weight
than items in the Assignment category.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Categories page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Manage Gradebook Categories.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add a category
Add Category. The Create/Modify Item Category page will
appear. On the Add Category page new categories can be
entered.
modify a category
Modify. The Create/Modify Item Category page will appear. On
the Modify Category page the category name and description
may be changed.
remove a category
Remove. A warning will appear. Removing a category is
irreversible.
Note: Categories included with the Blackboard Learning System cannot
be modified or removed.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 285 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CREATE/MODIFY ITEM CATEGORY
Overview
The Instructors may create new Gradebook categories and make changes to existing categories
from the Manage Gradebook Categories page. Categories can be added to the Gradebook and
modified from the Create/Modify Category page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Create/Modify Item Category page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Manage Gradebook Categories.
4.
Click Add Category.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create/Modify Item Category page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Category Information
Title [r]
Enter the name of the Gradebook category.
Description
Enter a description of the Gradebook category.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 286 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANAGE DISPLAY OPTIONS
Overview
Instructors may make changes to the display options from the Manage Display Options page.
Display Options define the scale for presenting grades.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Display Options page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Manage Display Options.
Functions
The table below details the available functions on the Manage Display Options page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add a grade
display option
Add Display Option. The Create/Modify Grade Display Option
page will appear. On the Add Grade Display Option page new
options may be created with a name, symbols, and values.
modify a grade
display option
Modify. The Create/Modify Grade Display Options page will
display all of the current information. On the Create/Modify
Display Option page the name, symbols, and options may be
changed. Score and Percentage display options cannot be
modified.
copy a grade
display option
Copy. The Manage Display Options page will appear with all of
the information filled in. The copy may be modified by selecting
Modify. Score and Percentage display options cannot be
copied.
remove a grade
display option
Remove. A warning pop-up window will appear. Removing a
category is irreversible. Display options included with the
Blackboard Learning System may not be removed and do not
have a Remove button associated with them.
Grade Display Options
The following Grade Display Options are included with the Blackboard Learning System:
Score – Score is the raw score earned by the Student. There is a limit of 6 digits. For example,
100.00 or 123456.
Percentage – Percentage is calculated by using the following calculation: (Raw Score/Points
Possible) *100
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 287 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Letter – Letter is a letter grade that equals a specific range of Percentages. For example, 94% to
97% equals an “A” Letter grade. The following Letter grades are built into the Blackboard Learning
System. Instructors may modify these on the Modify Grade Display Options page.
•
97% to 100% (or higher) = A+
•
94% to 97% = A
•
90% to 94% = A-
•
87% to 90% = B+
•
84% to 87% = B
•
80% to 84% = B-
•
77% to 80% = C+
•
74% to 77% = C
•
70% to 74% = C-
•
67% to 70% = D+
•
64% to 67% = D
•
60% to 64% = D-
•
59% or below = F
Text – Text allows the Instructor to enter any string as the score for a Gradebook item. It does not
have any calculable value. Scores that are entered as Text cannot be set to a numerical range. It is
not possible to copy this display option, or modify the possible values.
Complete / Incomplete – This option signifies that a Student has completed an item. It is the
default option for Surveys.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 288 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CREATE/MODIFY GRADE DISPLAY OPTIONS
Overview
Instructors can add and modify Grade Display Options in the Gradebook from the Create/Modify
Grade Display Options page. Instructors can select a range of numeric grades to be associated
with a letter grade, or create new Grade Displays, such as Pass/Fail. Grade Display Options are
case sensitive. An “A” and “a” will not represent the same thing in the Gradebook.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Create/Modify Grade Display Options page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Manage Grade Display Options.
4.
Select Add Display Option.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create/Modify Grade Display Options page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Name
Name [r]
Enter the name of the new Grade Display Option.
Add Symbols and Values
System-graded
items with a
grade of
Enter the numeric values of the range for each grade. The
system will automatically treat the numbers within each range
the same.
Manually-graded
items entered as
Enter the symbol the Instructor will use to manually enter
grades. Each symbol will correspond to the range in the
system-graded items.
Will be calculated
as
Enter a single numeric value for each symbol in the Manuallygraded items column. The number in this row will be used in
Gradebook calculations, such as for the final grade and grade
weight.
Add
Click Add to add a row in the Add Symbols and Values
section.
Remove
Click Remove to remove a row in the Add Symbols and
Values section.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 289 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
WEIGHT GRADES
Overview
Instructors can set a weight for each Gradebook item to determine a final grade. For example, a
final exam may be worth 25 percent of a Student's grade while a reading quiz may be worth only 10
percent. Instructors can adjust Gradebook weights according to category or item.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Weight Grades page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Weight Grades.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Weight Grades page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Weighting
Weight by
Category
Click Weight by Category to weight grades by the category.
For example, all Assignments will have the same weight and all
Quizzes will have the same weight. Enter the percentage to
weight each category in the boxes to the left.
Weight by Item
Click Weight by Item to weight grades by name as they are
defined in the Gradebook. For example, the mid-term exam can
be weighted differently then the final exam. Enter the
percentage to weight each item in the boxes to the left.
Important Information about Weighted Grades
The following information is important when weighting grades:
•
Gradebook items that have not been completed by Students are still calculated in the
weight. Instructors may exclude items from calculations on the Add/Modify Gradebook
Item page, however, this is not optimal if the grade will be considered as part of the final
grade at a later point. If the instructor is unsure, include the Gradebook Item in the
calculations and give it a weight of zero. It is then quite easy to change the weight of
grades throughout the term.
•
The percentages for Weight by Category must add up to 100 percent. An error message
will appear if the percentages do not add up to 100 percent.
•
The percentages for Weight by Item need not equal 100 percent. This allows the Instructor
the freedom to adjust weighting throughout the term. Please note that a total of more than
100 percent is not allowed, and a total of less than 100 percent, while allowed, will slightly
inflate the weighted total of individual items.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 290 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
•
Instructor Manual
If an item has a weight of 0 percent, the item will not be calculated in the grade weight.
This will occur if a new Gradebook item is added and a percentage for the item is not
added to the Weight by Item column.
When Weight by Category is selected, the following information will apply:
•
Each item in a category is worth the same weight, regardless of total points. For example,
if quizzes are worth 25% as a category, a quiz worth 50 points will not be weighted more
then a quiz worth 15 points.
•
The weight for each item is calculated by taking the weight for the category and dividing
that by the number of items in the category.
•
The number of items in the category is counted as the number of items the Instructor has
created in that category. Therefore, if Quizzes have a 100% weight and a Student takes
an exam and gets a perfect score, his or her weighted total will be 100%. If the Instructor
adds a second quiz, the Students weighted total will drop to 50%, since the weight for
each item is divided by two. Since, the Student has not taken the second exam yet, their
score for it is zero.
Tips for Weighting Grades
•
When creating Gradebook Items, always include items in the Gradebook calculations
unless there is no possibility that the item will be used to form students’ final grades.
Instead, give items a weight of zero until it is decided what the weight of the grade should
be.
•
Use a running total to give students a more accurate view of their progress to date. The
Total and Weighted Total columns in the gradebook can be modified to exempt items that
have not yet been graded. This will create a running total and a running weighted total.
•
Often, the weights of gradebook items will change throughout the term. In some cases,
this may be handled by weighting grades by category. For example, a final exam may be
worth 40 percent, essays may be worth 30 percent, and quizzes may be worth 30 percent.
In this manner, the instructor may add or remove quizzes and essays throughout the term
to coincide with student progress in key areas. If the gradebook is weighted by category,
such changes will be taken into account and applied automatically.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 291 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CALCULATING TOTAL AND WEIGHTED TOTAL IN THE GRADEBOOK
About Totals
Current Gradebook calculations for Total and Weighted Total include item that have not been
scored. For example, picture a course where the grade is determined by two tests weighted
equally. Using the current Gradebook settings, a Student with a score of 90 percent on the first quiz
would have a weighted total of 45 percent. This shows that the student has accumulated a score of
at least 45 percent in the course.
A new option to ignore ungraded items, or nulls, when calculating the total and weighted total
appears in Application Pack 3. In the example above, the student's progress would be reported as
90 percent.
When nulls are ignored, the Total and Weighted Total columns in the Gradebook are renamed to
Running Total and Running Weighted Total.
Calculating the Total and the Weighted Total
The table below details how Student progress is calculated in the Gradebook. Running Total and
Running Weighted Total are calculated without including ungraded items (nulls).
C ALCULATED
I TEM
W EIGHT BY
D ISPLAY
O PTION /
C ALCULATION
F ORMULA
Total &
Running
Total
Points Possible
∑ (Item.PointsPossible)
Total
Score
∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven)
Running
Total
Score
Same as Total above
Total
Percentage
∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven)
/
∑ (Item.PointsPossible)
Running
Total
Percentage
∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven)
/
∑ (Item.PointsPossible
not including items where
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 292 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
C ALCULATED
I TEM
Instructor Manual
W EIGHT BY
D ISPLAY
O PTION /
C ALCULATION
F ORMULA
Weighted
Total &
Running
Weighted
Total
Item
Points Possible
∑ (Item.PointsPossible *
Item.Weight)
Weighted
Total &
Running
Weighted
Total
Category
Points Possible
∑ (Item.PointsPossible *
Category.Weight)
Weighted
Total
Item
Score
∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven *
Item.Weight)
Weighted
Total
Category
Score
∑ (Category1
Attempt.PointsGiven) *
Category1.Weight +
∑ (Category2
Attempt.PointsGiven) *
Category2.Weight +
∑ (Category3
Attempt.PointsGiven) *
Category3.Weight + …
Running
Weighted
Total
Item
Score
Same as Item Weighted Total
above
Running
Weighted
Total
Category
Score
Same as Category Weighted
Total above
Weighted
Total
Item
Percentage
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven
/
Item.PointsPossible) *
Item.Weight]
/
∑ (Item.Weight)
Weighted
Total
Category
Percentage
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven
/
Item.PointsPossible) *
(Category.Weight /
Category.Number-Of-Items) ]
/
∑ (Category.Weight)
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 293 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
C ALCULATED
I TEM
Running
Weighted
Total
Instructor Manual
W EIGHT BY
Item
D ISPLAY
O PTION /
C ALCULATION
Percentage
F ORMULA
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven
/
Item.PointsPossible) *
Item.Weight]
/
∑ (Item.Weight not including
items where
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
Running
Weighted
Total
Category
Percentage
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven
/
Item.PointsPossible) *
(Category.Weight /
Category.Number-Of-NonNULLItems) ]
/
∑ (Category.Weight not
including where ALL items
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
The table shows that when calculated based on Points Possible ignoring ungraded items has no
effect.
Tip: The Running Total and Running Weighted Totals should use the
Percentage or Letter Grade display option when ignoring ungraded
items. This will display student performance only on completed items.
Set the Total or Weighted Total to Ignore Ungraded Items
The ability to include or ignore ungraded items is not available in all courses. The Administrator
must first turn on the feature. Existing courses will continue to include ungraded items until this
feature is enabled in the specific course. After confirming that the option is available, follow the
steps below to set the Gradebook to ignore ungraded items.
1.
Open the Gradebook.
2.
Click Total or Weighted Total. After setting one to ignore or include ungraded items, be
sure to set the other one.
3.
Click Item Information.
4.
Select Yes or No for Ignore Ungraded Attempts.
Example Calculation using Ignore Ungraded Items
The example below shows how ignoring ungraded items will affect the reported progress for one
user throughout a course. Keep in mind:
•
The final grade is made up of four quizzes, two tests, one paper, and one final exam.
•
The final grade is determined by totaling the scores of all Gradebook items and weighting
them by type. Quizzes are worth a total of 20 percent. Tests are worth 20 percent. The
paper is worth 30 percent and the final is worth 30 percent.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 294 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
•
The Gradebook is set to display scores as percentages.
•
In the tables below, grades are listed in chronological order and percentages are rounded
to the nearest whole number.
The table below shows the Total and Weighted Total displayed after each assignment is
completed. Ungraded items are included in the calculation. The formulas to generate the Total and
Weighted Total are:
•
Total: ∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven)
(Item.PointsPossible)
•
Weighted Total: ∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven /
Item.PointsPossible) * (Category.Weight / Category.NumberOf-Items) ]
G RADEBOOK I TEM
/
/
∑
∑ (Category.Weight)
G RADE
T OTAL
W EIGHTED T OTAL
Quiz 1
85
10%
4%
Quiz 2
90
22%
9%
Test 1
88
33%
18%
Quiz 3
75
42%
21%
Quiz 4
80
52%
25%
Paper
90
63%
52%
Test 2
80
73%
60%
Final Exam
92
85%
88%
Final Grade
88%
The table below shows the Running Total and Running Weighted Total displayed after each
assignment is completed. Keep in mind that ungraded items are included in the calculation. The
formulas to generate the Total and Weighted Total are:
•
Running Total: ∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven) / ∑
(Item.PointsPossible not including null values)
•
Running Weighted Total: ∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven /
Item.PointsPossible) * (Category.Weight / Category.NumberOf-NonNULL-Items) ] /
∑ (Category.Weight not including where ALL items
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
G RADEBOOK I TEM
G RADE
R UNNING T OTAL
R UNNING
W EIGHTED T OTAL
Quiz 1
85
85%
85%
Quiz 2
90
88%
88%
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 295 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
G RADEBOOK I TEM
Instructor Manual
G RADE
R UNNING T OTAL
R UNNING
W EIGHTED T OTAL
Test 1
88
88%
88%
Quiz 3
75
84%
86%
Quiz 4
80
84%
85%
Paper
90
85%
87%
Test 2
80
84%
86%
Final Exam
92
85%
88%
Final Grade
88%
For some added insight into Gradebook calculations look at how the Running Weighted Total is
calculated after the Student received a grade on the Paper. Remember that the formula to calculate
the Running Weighted Total is:
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven / Item.PointsPossible) *
(Category.Weight / Category.Number-Of-NonNULL-Items)] / ∑
(Category.Weight not including where ALL items
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
Q1: [(85/100) * (.2/4)] = .0425
Q2: [(90/100) * (.2/4)] = .045
T1: [(88/100) * (.2/1)] = .176
Q3: [(75/100) * (.2/4)] = .0375
Q2: [(80/100) * (.2/4)] = .04
P : [(90/100) * (.3/1)] = .27
Sum
= .611
Running Total
= .611/.7 = .873
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 296 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
DOWNLOAD GRADEBOOK
Overview
Instructors can download and save a Gradebook as a comma-delimited file for use in a
spreadsheet program. This file, or Gradebook items in this file, can be uploaded to a Gradebook at
a later date.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Download Gradebook page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Download Grades.
Download Gradebook
Click Download and select where to save the Gradebook file. Downloading a Gradebook does not
remove any information from the Gradebook.
Note: The Total and Weighted Total columns are included in a
Gradebook download. However, these columns will not be included in a
Gradebook Upload, because they are generated by calculations within
the Gradebook. The Instructor cannot manipulate the data for these
areas.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 297 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
UPLOAD GRADEBOOK
Overview
Instructors may upload Gradebook information into the Blackboard Learning System from the
Upload Gradebook page.
The Gradebook Upload will fail if the user name for each row of data is not present. Also, the
Gradebook will not process the data for any Username that is not enrolled as a user in the Learning
System course. Changes to the first name and last name columns will not be processed.
Note: For best results, Instructors should manipulate and upload a
Gradebook that has been downloaded from the Blackboard Learning
System (Release 6 or higher). It is not advised that Instructors create a
new Gradebook from scratch then upload it. Also, it is not possible to
upload a Gradebook from an earlier version of the Blackboard Learning
System, such as Blackboard 5.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Upload Gradebook page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Upload Gradebook.
Upload a Gradebook
Click Browse and select the file to upload to the Gradebook. The Choose Column to Import page
will appear. On this page the Instructor may specify which item he or she would like to upload to the
Gradebook. When a Gradebook is uploaded the existing grades are not automatically written over
or lost. In the following Web pages the Instructor chooses which information is uploaded and
written over.
Gradebooks may be uploaded as .csv files (using a spreadsheet) or as .txt (flat files). When
uploading as a .txt file, check to make sure that the file uses the following format:
"Last Name, First Name (User Name) | Student
Id","item1","item2","test 4","survey","Total","Weighted Total"
Keep in mind that the values for total and weighted total will not be processed as part of the upload.
Only the scores for the individual Gradebook Items will be uploaded.
If the name of a column in the source does not match the name of a column in the destination, the
user will be notified. They may decide whether or not they would like to proceed with the operation.
Note: The Total and Weighted Total columns cannot be included in a
Gradebook upload because this data is generated by calculations within
the Gradebook. Instructors cannot manipulate the data for these areas.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 298 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CHOOSE COLUMN TO IMPORT: ITEMS
Overview
Instructors select which items in a Gradebook file they would like to upload to the Blackboard
Learning System from the Choose Column to Import page. Instructors may choose to overwrite an
existing item (this will not automatically overwrite Students’ grades) or create a new Gradebook
item.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Choose Column to Import page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Upload Gradebook.
3.
Select a file to upload on the Upload Gradebook page and click Submit.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Choose Column to Import page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Choose Imported Item
Select the column in the file that should be uploaded to the Gradebook.
Choose Existing Item
Select the column in the Gradebook where the name of the uploaded Gradebook item
should appear. If the information should appear in a new column in the Gradebook
select Create New Gradebook Item. If Create New Gradebook Item is selected the
Modify Gradebook Item will appear.
Functions
If a Gradebook item in Choose Import Item is uploaded to an existing item, the only data that is
uploaded and changed is the Gradebook item name. The Instructor selects which Student’s grades
should be uploaded and written over on the Choose Column to Import: Students page.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 299 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CHOOSE COLUMN TO IMPORT: STUDENTS
Overview
When uploading Gradebook information, Instructors select one or more items in a Gradebook file
they would like to upload from the first Choose Column to Import page. On the second Choose
Column to Import page Instructors choose which Student information is uploaded from the
Gradebook file. Only those Student’s grades that are selected on this page will be uploaded to the
destination file.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Choose Column to Import: Students page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Upload Gradebook.
3.
Select a file to upload on the Upload Gradebook page and click Submit.
4.
Select which item in the file to upload and click Submit.
Functions
The table below details the available functions on the Choose Column to Import: Students page.
TO . . .
CLICK
upload information
from the file for
one or more
Students
the checkboxes next to the Student’s names.
add information for
all of the Students
in the file to the
Gradebook
Select All. All of the check boxes next to the Student names will
be selected.
clear the
checkboxes next to
all of the Student
names
Select None. All of the check boxes next to the Student names
will be removed.
select the opposite
Students then
those whose
checkboxes are
selected.
Select Inverse. The checkboxes for those Students who had
been selected will be cleared and those Students who had not
been selected will be chosen.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 300 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MODIFY GRADE: ASSESSMENT
Overview
Instructors can modify a single Student grade on the Modify Grade page. On this page Instructors
can also add comments for the Student.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Modify Grades: Assessment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a grade on the spreadsheet.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page. If multiple attempts are allowed for the
item, each attempt will be listed with the same set of options.
TO…
THEN …
change the grade
a Student received
on the Assessment
enter the new grade in the Grade field. There is a limit of 6
digits in this field. For example, 100.00 or 123456.
view the details of
the Assessment
submitted by the
Student
click View to open the Grade Assessment: Assessment Name
page. This page enables the Instructor to view the answers a
Student submitted for a Test and the correct answers.
Instructors can also change the number of points a Student is
awarded for a question.
clear a Grade
Clear Attempt. The Grade for the item will be reset.
Change Grade
Instructors may change the Student’s grade on this page in the Calculated Grade column. The
points a Student receives for a specific questions may be changed on the Grade Assessment:
Assessment Name page, which may be accessed by selecting View.
Override Grade
Instructors may manually override a Student’s grade on this page in the Override Grade field. This
grade appears in the Gradebook regardless of the grading option chosen. For example, if the
Instructor has selected the lowest scores to display in the Gradebook, but inputs a higher score
then the lowest in this field, the score in in the Override Grade field will appear.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 301 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
GRADE ASSESSMENT
Overview
The Gradebook enables Instructors to manage all aspects of Student grades. The Grade
Assessment page enables the Instructor to view a Student’s answers to Assessment questions as
well as the correct answers. Instructors may also modify the number of points a Student is given for
their answer to a question.
Note: Instructors may read and grade Essay questions on this page
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Grade Assessment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a grade on the spreadsheet. The My Grades page will appear.
3.
Click Grades.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
TO…
THEN …
clear the Student’s
submission and
enable them to
take the
Assessment again
click Clear Attempt. The Student will be able to re-take the
Assessment.
change the
number of points a
Student received
for a question
change the number of points in the field corresponding to the
question. Points received for an Essay question are input here.
Comments
Instructors can add comments to each Graded Attempt. Comments are viewed by Students when
they review their grades. Click Comments from the Modify Grade page to add or edit a comment.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 302 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ITEM OPTIONS: TESTS AND SURVEYS
Overview
The Item Options page enables Instructors to access areas where they can modify the Gradebook
item and view item statistics. These options enable the Instructor to:
•
view all Students’ grades for this Item
•
view details and statistics about the Gradebook item, such as, the class average and the
high and low score received
•
view and modify the Item, for example, make changes to the description or change the
availability of the Item
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Item Options page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Gradebook item.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Item Grade List
View a list of Students and their grades for this Assessment.
Item Detail
View the Assessment statistics, such as the average score and
the percentage of Student who answered questions correctly
and incorrectly.
Item Information
Modify the Gradebook item information, such as item name and
description.
Assessment
Attempt Details
View the statistics for how Students answered questions on an
Assessment.
Download Results
Download the results from tests and surveys.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 303 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIEW ITEM GRADES
Overview
Instructors may view a list of Student grades for a specific Gradebook item on the View Item
Grades page.
Note: When this page is accessed for a Survey the fields will contain a
check mark for those Students who have completed the Survey.
Surveys are not graded; therefore, individual grades will not appear on
this page. If a user has exceeded the time limit set for a survey, an
exclamation point will be displayed. The Instructor may enter a value in
the Grade field. After the value is entered, a check mark will be
displayed in the Gradebook for the survey.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View Item Grades page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Gradebook item. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Item Grade List.
View Attempt
Instructors may view a Student attempt by clicking the grade that appears in the Published Grade
field.
Override grade
Instructors may overwrite the grade a Student has received in the Override Grade field. Enter the
new grade and click Submit. When this option is used, the grade entered in this field will always be
used to calculate the grade. For example, if the Instructor has allowed multiple attempts and
selects the highest grade option for grading purposes, the score in the Override Grade column in
used to calculate the grade, not the highest grade.
Clear attempts for all students
The Clear attempts for all students option allows the Instructor to delete an Assessment attempt
for all Students in the class. For example, the Instructor may decide to have the class retake a quiz
taken on a specific date; this option may be used to remove the existing grades from that day.
Select an option in the drop-down list and click Go. For example, if the Lowest scored attempt is
selected, the lowest score for each student will be removed.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 304 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIEW ITEM DETAIL
Overview
Instructors can view details for a Gradebook item on the My Grades page. These details include:
•
the number of possible points
•
the class average
•
the high score in the class
•
the low score in the class
•
the variance of how far scores diverge from the average
Note: This is an informational page. No data may be modified or
deleted.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View Item Detail page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Gradebook item. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Item Detail.
Surveys
When this page is accessed for a Survey the fields will not contain any information. Surveys are not
graded and Survey questions do not have points.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 305 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ASSESSMENT STATS
Overview
The Assessment Stats page allows Instructors to view the statistics for a specific Assessment and
Assessment questions. Statistics include:
•
the average score Students receive on the Assessment
•
the average number of points a Student received for each question
•
the percentage of correct and incorrect answers on a question by question basis
Note: This is an informational page. No data may be modified or deleted
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Assessment Stats page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Gradebook item. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Assessment Attempt Details.
Surveys
Instructors may view the results of surveys on this page. Results to individual Student attempts on
Surveys are not available.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 306 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
DOWNLOAD ASSESSMENT RESULTS
Overview
The results of Assessments may be downloaded for statistical analysis. Analysis is done through
another application, such as Microsoft Excel. Only the results of Multiple Choice and True/False
questions are included in a results download because these questions have a limited set of defined
answers. Other question types, such as essay or fill-in-blank, are not included.
The results download file is a comma-delimited (.CSV) file.
Download the results of an Assessment
Follow these steps to download results.
1.
Click on a Gradebook Item from the Gradebook spreadsheet view.
2.
Click Download Results from the Item Options page.
3.
Select to download the results By User or By Question and User.
4.
Click OK on the Download Results page.
5.
The file download box will appear. Select a location and a name for the file.
Note: If the Assessment has over 40 questions select the option By
Question and User. If the By User option is selected an error message
may appear.
Note: The Instructor may notice that one or more attempts are missing
in the download. This may occur because of a bad import, data
corruption or similar incident. When this occurs, a warning will appear in
the Administrator's log file stating "Gradebook grade entry found with no
matching attempt. Possible database corruption. "
Analyze the data
Consider the following points when analyzing results:
•
Each row represents an assessment attempt. If a user attempts an assessment twice,
only the most recent attempt will appear.
•
Questions and answers are reported in the order presented to the Student. If an
assessment includes random questions than each line in the results will report questions
in a different order (question 1 for one Student may be question 5 for another Student).
•
Survey results will not show user data for each attempt.
•
Results from a user with a course role of Instructor, Grader, or Teaching Assistant will not
be reported.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 307 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MODIFY GRADES: ASSIGNMENT
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment it will appear in the Gradebook, where Instructors can
access and grade it. Instructors can modify a single Student grade on the Modify Grades page,
make notes and add comments for the Student. Students access their grades and comments from
the Instructor through the Course Menu.
Note: Assignments are created by selecting Add Assignment in a
Course area.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View Grades: Assignment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select an Assignment grade on the View Spreadsheet page.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
TO…
THEN …
enter or change
the grade the
Student received
on the Assignment
enter the new grade in the Grade field. There is a limit of 6
digits in this field. For example, 100.00 or 123456.
view the
Assignment and
add comments
click View to open the Grade Assignment: Assignment Name
page. This page enables the Instructor to view the Assignment
submitted by the Student. Instructors may enter a grade, submit
comments for the Student, and upload files.
clear a Grade
Clear Attempt. The Grade for the item will be reset.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 308 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
GRADE ASSIGNMENT
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment a link to their work will appear in the Gradebook, where
Instructors can review, respond, and grade it. Instructors can review the Student’s Assignment on
the Grade Assignment page. Students may only submit an Assignment once unless their attempt
has been cleared by the Instructor on the Grade Assignment page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Grade Assignment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click on the individual user’s score of the Assignment that needs to be graded.
3.
Click View on the Modify Grade page.
Field
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Assignment Information
Name
The name of the Assignment.
Instructions
The instructions for this Assignment.
Assignment
Files
Files uploaded by the Instructor when the Assignment was
created.
Clear Attempt
Click Clear Attempt to delete the Student’s Assignment. The
Student will be able to re-submit the Assignment once this option
is chosen.
Student’s Work
Student’s
Comments
Comments entered by the Student when the Assignment was
submitted.
Student’s Files
Files uploaded by the Student when the Assignment was
submitted.
Feedback to Students
Grade
Enter a grade for the Assignment.
Comments
Enter comments for the Student to view when they access the
grade for this Assignment.
Attach local file
Click Browse to select a file stored locally. Click Submit or Add
Another File to attach.
Copy file from
Click Browse and select a file to add as an attachment from the
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 309 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Content
Collection
Content Collection
Currently
Attached Files
Lists the files currently attached to the Instructor Comments. The
Student will be able to view these files when they access their
grade for the Assignment. If multiple files should be attached,
click Add Another File to add additional files.
Remove a file
Once a file has been added, a Remove button appears next to it.
Click this button to remove the file.
Instructor Notes
Notes
Enter notes for this Assignment. These notes are only viewed by
the Instructor.
Attach local file
Click Browse to select a file stored locally. Click Submit or Add
Another File to attach.
Copy file from
Content
Collection
Click Browse and select a file from the Content Collection to
add as an attachment from the Content Collection
Currently
Attached Files
Lists the files currently attached to the Instructor Notes. These
files are only viewable by the Instructor. If multiple files should
be attached, click Add Another File to add additional files.
Remove a file
Once a file has been added, a Remove button appears next to it.
Click this button to remove the file.
Copy files from the Content Collection
Users may select files stored in the Content Collection to add to different course areas, such as
Assignments, items, and Assessments. Select Browse next to Copy file from Content
Collection. A new window opens displaying the Content Collection view. Once the file has been
selected, choose Submit or Add Another File to attach the file.
When files are attached, users must select either Attach Local File or Copy File from Content
Collection. If files that are stored both locally and in the Content Collection should be submitted,
use one of the options to select a file, click Add Another File, then use the other option to select
the other files.
Note: The Copy File from Content Collection option is only available if
the Blackboard Content System is installed and the option has been
made available by the System Administrator.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 310 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ITEM OPTIONS: ASSIGNMENTS
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment it will appear in the Gradebook, where Instructors can
access and grade it. The Item Options page enables Instructors to access areas where they can
grade the Assignment, view Student statistics for the Assignment and delete files associated with
Assignments.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Item Options: Assignments page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select an Assignment item in the Gradebook.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page:
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Item Grade List
View a list of Students and their grades for this Assignment.
Item Detail
View the Assignment statistics.
Item Information
Modify the Gradebook item information, such as item name and
description.
Item Download
Download Assignments submitted by Students.
Item File Clean Up
Delete files for specific Students.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 311 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
DOWNLOAD ASSIGNMENT
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment it will appear in the Gradebook, where Instructors can
access and grade it. The Download Assignments page enables the Instructor to download Student
assignments and save them.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Download Assignment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select an Assignment item in the Gradebook. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Item Download.
Fields
The following table details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Students
Check All
Select this option to download the files for all of the Students on
the list who have submitted Assignments.
Check Ungraded
Select this option to select the check boxes and download the
files for those Student’s whose Assignments have not been
graded.
Uncheck All
Select this option to deselect all of the check boxes.
Download Assignments
The Instructor selects the check boxes next to the Student Assignments he or she would like to
download. Individual or multiple check boxes may be selected. After Submit is selected a
Download Assignment page appears. Click the link on this page to save the exported assignments
to a location on the hard drive, where they can be accessed. The file name automatically includes
the user name of the Student who submitted the file.
For example, a file submitted by Mary Wallace (user name ‘mwallace’) for Week 1 Assignment:
Week_1_Assignment_mwallace
DELETE ASSIGNMENT FILES
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 312 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment it will appear in the Gradebook where Instructors can
access and grade it. The Delete Assignment Files page enables the Instructor to delete files that
are attached to an Assignment. This includes:
•
files submitted by a Student
•
files the Instructor has included in his or her feedback on the Grade Assignment page
•
files the Instructor has included in his or her notes on the Grade Assignment page
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Delete Assignment Files page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select an Assignment item in the Gradebook. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Item File Clean Up.
Fields
The following table details the fields on this page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Students
Check All
Select this option to select and delete all files associated with
an Assignment.
Check All Student
Files
Select this option to select and delete all files submitted by a
Student for an Assignment.
Check All
Instructor’s Files
for Students
Select this option to select and delete files sent to a Student
from an Instructor for an Assignment. These files are attached
on the Grade Assignment: Assignment Name page.
Check All
Instructor’s
Personal Files
Select this option to delete files an Instructor attached to an
Assignment for personal notes. These files are attached on the
Grade Assignment: Assignment Name page.
Check Graded
Select this option to select and delete those files for
Assignments that have been graded.
Uncheck All
Select this option to deselect all of the check boxes.
Note: Single or multiple files may be selected in the left-side check
boxes by clicking Control.
USER OPTIONS
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 313 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Overview
Instructors can view details about a Student from the User Options page. This includes their
personal information, such as address and phone number, and statistical information about their
performance in the course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the User Options page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Student Name on the Spreadsheet.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page:
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
User Grade List
View a list of Students and their grades for this Assessment.
User Detail
View statistics about a Student, such as their average grade on
an Assessment.
User Information
View information about a Student, such as name and address.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 314 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIEW USER INFORMATION
Overview
Instructors can view Student information, such as address and phone number, on the View User
Information page.
Note: is an informational page. No data may be modified or deleted.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View User Information page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Student Name on the Spreadsheet. The User Options page will appear.
3.
Select User Information.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 315 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIEW USER GRADES
Overview
Instructors can view all grades for an individual Student on the View User Grades page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View User Grades page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Student Name on the Spreadsheet. The User Options page will appear.
3.
Select User Grade List.
Function
Instructors may view and modify a Student’s grades from the View User Grades page. To modify a
grade, enter it in the Override box next to the Calculated Grade and click Submit. The Grade will
be updated in the Gradebook.
Note: Surveys are not graded; therefore, individual grades will not
appear on this page. A check mark will appear in place of the grade. If a
user has exceeded the time limit set for a survey, an exclamation point
will be displayed. The Instructor may enter a value in the Grade field.
After the value is entered, a check mark will be displayed for the survey.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 316 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIEW USER DETAIL
Overview
The View User Detail page displays the overall Gradebook statistics for an individual Student, such
as their average grade.
Note: This is an informational page. No data may be modified or
deleted.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View User Detail page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Student Name on the Spreadsheet. The User Options page will appear.
3.
Select User Detail.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 317 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
GRADEBOOK VIEWS
Overview
Gradebook Views allows the Instructor to view the Gradebook by item or by user. This is especially
useful for locating and modifying information in courses with a great number of users and a great
number of Gradebook items.
The Gradebook Views page includes links that show the Users in the Gradebook or the Items in the
Gradebook. This is a tool for quick searching in the Gradebook.
Find this page
Click Gradebook Views from the Assessment section of the Control Panel to open this page.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Gradebook Views page.
TO . . .
CLICK
access a list of Gradebook
items
View Grades by Item
access a list of users that
appear in the Gradebook
View Grades by User
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 318 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIEW GRADES BY GRADEBOOK ITEM
Overview
The View Grades by Gradebook Item page shows a list of all the items that are in the Gradebook.
Gradebook details about each item can be accessed through this page. The page also contains a
filter to make finding items easier.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the View Grades by Item page.
1.
Click Gradebook Views on the Control Panel.
2.
Click View Grades by Item.
Features
The following features are available on the View Grades By Gradebook Item page.
TO . . .
CLICK
sort Items
Click the caret at the top of each column to sort the list of items
by that column. Items will appear in alphabetical order (A to Z),
chronological order (most recent to earliest), or numerical order
(greatest to least).
show only certain
items
the drop-down list, Filter Items by Category, and select a
category. Click Go to display a list of items in that category.
view details of a
particular item
the name of the item in the list. The Item Options page for that
category of item will appear.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 319 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
VIEW GRADES BY USER
Overview
The View Grades by User page shows a list of all the Users that are in the Gradebook. Gradebook
details about each User can be accessed through this page. The page also contains a filter to
make finding users easier.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the View Grades by User page.
1.
Click Gradebook Views on the Control Panel.
2.
Click View Grades by User.
Features
The following features are available on the View Grades By User page.
TO . . .
CLICK
show only certain
Users
the drop-down list, Filter Users by Last Name, and select a
letter. Click Go to display a list of Users whose last name
begins with that letter.
view details of a
particular User
the name of the User in the list. The User Options page will
appear.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 320 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE STATISTICS
Overview
Instructors can use the Course Statistics area to generate reports on the course usage and activity.
Instructors can view specific Student’s usage to determine if Students are actively using the
Course. The report appears in the form of graphical charts.
Please note that, when viewing reports that include hit or access statistics, a hit is tracked every
time a request is sent to the Blackboard Learning System. For example, when tracking use of the
Communication Area: a Student accesses the Communication area (1 hit), clicks Discussion
Boards (2 hits), clicks a forum (3 hits), and clicks a message to read (4 hits).
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Statistics page.
1.
Select a course you are teaching and open the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Statistics in Assessments.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Statistics page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Report Filer
Report Type
Select one of the following reports:
•
Overall Summary of Usage
•
Accesses by Course area
•
Accesses by Groups
•
Accesses by Forum
Time Period
Click Start Date and select a date to begin the report on.
Select End Date and choose a date to end the report. If
End Date is not selected the report will begin on the Start
Date and end on the current date.
Users
Select All Users to view a report containing information
from all users who have accessed the Course. Select
Selected Users to view a report for specific users. If this
option is selected, choose users in the box below to
include in the report. To choose more then one user hold
down Shift or Control.
EARLY WARNING SYSTEM
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 321 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
INTRODUCTION TO THE EARLY WARNING SYSTEM
About the Early Warning System
The Early Warning System is a tool used to communicate warnings to Students or Observers that a
performance problem is beginning to appear or has become more serious. Warnings can be
generated based on graded performance, late or missing course work, or attendance within the
online course. The Instructor can choose to communicate a particular warning to just the Student,
the Student and a parent or advisor that is assigned as an Observer, or just the Student’s
Observer. In addition, the Instructor has control over the message each time a warning is
communicated. The Instructor can use the default message or modify it to more accurately
communicate the seriousness of the situation.
Important Information about the Early Warning System
When using the Early Warning System, please keep the following key points in mind:
•
The Early Warning System does not continuously monitor the course. The Instructor
must check the Early Warning System periodically and click Refresh to discover incidents
of Student performance that trigger an alert. The Early Warning System consolidates
these incidents and allows the Instructor to easily report problems, the Early Warning
System does not automatically detect problems and notify Students and Observers.
Remember to refresh rules manually on a regular basis.
•
The System Administrator may turn off access to the Early Warning System based on
policies at the institution. If the Early Warning System is on at the system-level, the
Instructor may still turn it off within the course.
•
The Early Warning System keeps a log of alerts sent to users. The log is searchable and
can be used to verify that a Student was alerted to a problem.
Early Warning System and the Gradebook
The Early Warning System is designed to work closely with the Gradebook. Early Warning System
rules use gradebook results to create rules and create alerts to student performance based on
those rules. In particular, the Early Warning System can trigger an alert based on grades recorded
in the gradebook. As well, Assignments or Assessments that are not completed by the deadline
may also be used to trigger an alert.
Early Warning System and the Performance Dashboard
The Performance Dashboard includes information about Early Warning System alerts. The Early
Warning Column shows the number of warnings and the number of total rules that may trigger a
warning. Clicking on the data in this column will open the Early Warning System. The Early
Warning System column will only display if the tool is turned on in the course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 322 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
MANAGE EARLY WARNING SYSTEM RULES
Overview
Rules determine when the Early Warning System flags student performance. It is up to the
Instructor to communicate the warning to the user through the Notification Log. There are three
options for rules:
•
Grade Rule: Identifies when student performance on an Assignment, Assessment, or
manually graded item is equal to or below a certain level. It is also possible to set a Grade
Rule that identifies when a user exceeds a performance level. This can be a useful tool for
positive feedback.
•
Due Date Rule: Identifies when a Student does not complete course work when it is due.
A Due Date Rule can only be used to track an Assignment or Assessment created through
the Blackboard Learning System. Due Date Rules cannot be created for manually graded
items.
•
Last Access Rule: Identifies the last time a Student accessed the course online.
Please keep in mind that rules are not constantly running in the background checking for events.
Regularly refresh the Early Warning System to run the rules and check for events that will trigger a
warning.
Add rule
Follow these steps to add a rule.
1.
Open the Control Panel.
2.
Select Early Warning System.
3.
Click Add Grade Rule, Add Due Date Rule, or Add Last Access Rule.
4.
Enter a name and availability for the rule and then set the rule criteria.
Modify rule
Follow these steps to modify a rule.
1.
Open the Control Panel.
2.
Select Early Warning System.
3.
Click Modify for a rule from the list.
4.
Change the rule information and criteria.
It is also possible to change the availability of a rule by selecting it, along with several other rules if
desired, from the list on the Early Warning System page and then clicking Available or
Unavailable from the action bar.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 323 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Remove rule
Follow these steps to remove a rule.
1.
Open the Control Panel.
2.
Select Early Warning System.
3.
Select one or many rules from the list.
4.
Click Remove. Confirm that the selected rules should be deleted.
Refresh Rules
Follow these steps to refresh rules.
1.
Open the Control Panel.
2.
Select Early Warning System.
3.
Select one or more rules from the list.
4.
Click Refresh from the action bar. The selected rules will be run and any events that
trigger the rule will create a warning.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 324 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
REVIEW ALERTS AND NOTIFY USERS
Overview
The Early Warning System helps Instructors notifies Students and Observers when an alert is
triggered. Instructors can view alerts and send notifications simply by clicking on a rule listed on the
Early Warning System page.
View Alerts
Follow these steps to view alerts generated from a rule.
1.
Open the Control Panel.
2.
Select Early Warning System.
3.
Click on the name of a rule in the list.
4.
The Review Rule Status page will appear.
The Review Rule Status page lists all the users in the course and identifies whether or not their
performance meets the criteria for the rule and lists details regarding performance. For example, if
the Instructor set a Grade rule to trigger an alert for all users with a score less than 65, those users
with a score with less than 65 would show Yes in the Meets Criteria column. The page also shows
when the user was last notified regarding their performance. Please keep in mind that
communicating an alert to users does not happen automatically. The Instructor can customize the
message as well as who receives the alert.
Finally, click on the Username to see a detailed view of the user’s performance against all rules.
Sending Email
Follow these steps to notify users when their performance triggers an alert.
1.
Open the Control Panel.
2.
Select Early Warning System.
3.
Click on a rule in the list.
4.
Select the users to notify from the list.
5.
From the Notify drop-down list, choose the recipients of the notification. The choices are:
Student User Only: This option will only send the notification message to the selected
Students.
Observer Users Only: This option will only send the notification to those users assigned
as
Observers
to
the
selected
Students.
Student and Observer Users: This option will send the notification to the Student and
any
assigned
Observers.
Other: This option allows the sender to enter email addresses for the recipients of the
notification.
With all options, the sender can enter additional email addresses as blind carbon copy
(bcc) recipients.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 325 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
6.
Click Go. The Send Notification page will appear with the To field populated with the
names of those users that will receive the notification.
7.
Edit the Subject and Message and click Submit to send the notification. The notification
may include attachments. Also, the sender may copy themselves on the message.
Notification log
The Notification Log serves as a record of Early Warning System communications to users. The log
can be used to confirm that Students were made aware of performance problems. Follow these
steps to view the log.
1.
Open the Control Panel.
2.
Select Early Warning System.
3.
Click Notification Log from the action bar.
The Notification Log lists each notification by individual user. It includes a search function for
narrowing the results to locate a particular notification.
ORGANIZING AND MANAGING CONTENT
About organizing and managing content
The Content Collection allows Instructors to store, share, and publish content within personal user
folders, course folders and institution folders. This chapter explains how to organize and manage
content in ways that are beneficial to them and to other users in the system.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following topics:
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
Organize content in folders
Describes how content is organized within folders.
Organize folder permissions
Explains how folder permissions are managed.
Tools for sharing and finding
content
Describes tools available for searching and
sharing content.
Organize course content
Explains how to organize content and
permissions for courses.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 326 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ORGANIZE CONTENT IN FOLDERS
About Organizing Content
Before adding any content to the Content Collection, users should plan out how they will manage
their content. This will allow them to organize content in a way which best meets their individual
needs.
Files in the Content Collection are organized in a tree structure of nested folders up to, and
including, the content area level. This means that each folder may contain other subfolders and
files. The term “items” refers to files and folders.
A folder stores both files and other folders. Folders are automatically available to the user who
added the folder but must be shared if other users are to view the folder and its contents. It is
important to remember that all folders are contained within other folders up to the root (/) folder.
Root folders are folders in which all other folders are placed. Content areas, such as Users,
Courses, Institution, and Library, are simply folders stored under the root folder.
The system does not allow subfolders with the same name in a single parent folder. For example,
two folders named Group Projects may not be created in the top-level of the username folder. The
system also does not allow files with the same name to exist in a folder.
Private content space and Public content space
Creating separate folders for personal content (private space) and folders that are available to
other users (public space) is very helpful. This method allows the user to have certain folders
available only to them, where they can store personal content. For example, one personal folder
may contain papers and projects that are in progress, while another contains professional content
that is not ready to be shared, such as resumes and cover letters for jobs. Additional permissions
for these personal folders are not granted to anyone else.
When a document is ready to be shared, it may be copied or moved to a public folder. For
example, if an Instructor is working on a course document he or she can create the draft in a
personal folder, and then move it to a shared folder when it is complete. The shared folder is
shared with all users enrolled in the class (public space that is set to be available to only course
members), and allows for collaboration.
Creating a private folder
A private folder is created in the same way as other folders in the Content Collection, through the
Add Folder option. The permissions granted on the folder determine whether or not it is private.
In the username folder, a private folder is a subfolder that is not shared with any other users. A
user may create a subfolder in his or her username folder and not grant any other users
permissions to it.
In a course folder, a private folder may be specifically for the Instructor, or it may also be accessible
by users with other course roles. For example, a private subfolder may be created with permissions
granted to the Instructor, Teaching Assistant, and Course Builder. This folder would not be
available to any Students enrolled in the course.
Creating a Public folder
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 327 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Similar to private folders, public folders are created in the same way as other folders, using the
Add Folder option. The permissions granted on a folder determine whether or not it becomes to
multiple users and groups of users. Any user with Manage Permissions may share the item with a
wider audience.
In a username folder, a public folder may be created and shared with a group of users collaborating
on a project.
In a course folder, a public folder may be created and shared with all users enrolled in the course.
This folder would include course information or articles that the whole class needs to read.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 328 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ORGANIZE FOLDER PERMISSIONS
Organizing Folders
It is helpful if users organize folders in a way that allows them to manage permissions by folder,
rather than by file. For example, create a folder that contains all files used in a group project. This
way the entire folder may be shared with the group members, rather than trying to manage
permissions on separate items stored in different folders.
Only Read permission should be added to a top-level folder, for example the username folder.
Anytime a Permission is added or changed on the top-level folder, check any subfolders or files
designated as Private and verify that additional permissions have not inadvertently been added that
would expose protected information.
Sharing Folders
When adding folders and files to the Content Collection, keep in mind which users and user lists
the content will be shared with. Try to create folders in which all items are to be shared with the
same users. When items shared with the same users are spread out among different folders, it may
become very difficult to manage. For example, if the user plans on creating documents that will be
applicable to all users at the institution, they should create a folder that will be shared with All
System Users, then add the specific items to this folder.
Sharing files
Files are automatically available to the user that added the file but must be shared if other users
are to view the item.
Files inherit permissions from the folder they reside in. This means that if a file is added to a folder
that already has Read and Write permission for certain users or user lists, the those same users
will also have Read and Write permission on the newly added file.
Overwrite Option on Folders
When modifying or adding permissions to a parent folder, the user has the option to force all files
and subfolders to inherit these permissions. For example, if the Read and Write permissions are
added to the folder, and an item within the folder has Read, Write, and Remove permissions,
Remove permissions would be removed from the file. All subfolders and files within the parent
folder would be granted Read and Write permissions.
If this option is not selected, the files and subfolders are automatically granted any additional
permission given to the parent folder, but existing permissions are not removed. For example, if
Read, Write and Manage permissions are added to the folder, and an item within the folder has
Read, Write, and Remove permissions, the permissions for the file would remain Read, Write and
Remove, and Manage would be added.
After modifying permissions on a folder, the user may modify the permissions on an item, but these
will be overwritten the next time permissions on the parent folder are modified. This is one reason
storing items with the same purpose and audience in a single folder makes managing permissions
much easier.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 329 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
TOOLS FOR SHARING AND FINDING CONTENT
About Tools for sharing and finding content
A number of tools are available to facilitate sharing content and searching for content that has been
shared. These options are dependent on the level of the folder shared, for example granting
permission on a top-level folder versus a subfolder. Remember that when a folder is shared,
permissions are granted to all content in the folder.
Find Folder
The Find Folder option allows users to search for top-level folders they have permissions to, for
example if another user has granted him or her Read permission on a username folder. When a
user is granted permissions to a top-level folder, the Find Folder option allows the user to locate the
folder and add it to his or her Content Collection menu, making is easy to access the folder on a
regular basis.
Users may decide to share a top-level folder with another user, and then adjust the permissions on
the content within, limiting the content this user may access. For example, grant the user Read
permission on the username folder. Then open the folder and remove Read permission for the
content this user should not view. The user may still use the Find Folder option, but they will only
view specific content in the folder.
Search
Search allows users to locate all files and folders that have been shared with them. When a search
is performed only those items to which a user has permissions will be returned. If permissions are
granted on a nested folder (and not the top-level folder) the user may search for the folder and
bookmark it; the Find Folder option may not be used on nested folders.
Go To Location
Go to Location allows users to go directly to a specific folder that has been shared with them in the
Content Collection. This time-saver allows users to enter the path to open a folder and Bookmark
the location at the same time.
Bookmarks
Bookmarks enable quick access to frequently used content a without having to navigate through
several folders. Bookmarks can be organized into folders and subfolders as needed by the user.
This tool is helpful when permissions are granted on a nested folder, since the Find Folder tool may
not be used.
Workflow Activities
If a user is expected to take action or respond to an item, it is helpful to send a Workflow Activity
with the item. When a Workflow Activity is created users are selected to share the item with and
permissions are granted. An option may also be selected to send an email to these users stating
that this item has been shared with them and that a Workflow Activity is attached to it.
Passes
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 330 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Passes may be used to share a file with a user for a specific amount of time. This is especially
useful for sharing files with users who do not have system accounts. When a pass is created, the
user decides whether to grant Read or Read and Write permission to the file with the pass. When
the time allotted for the pass is over, the user will no longer be able to access the file.
Portfolios
Portfolios allow users to collect and organize files into custom Web pages. These Portfolios can
then be presented to individuals and groups of users. It is important that users consider the
permissions granted to files that are linked to in a Portfolio. If another user has permissions (other
than Read) to a file that is linked to a Portfolio, the file may be modified or removed, resulting in
issues for the Portfolio users.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 331 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ORGANIZE COURSE FOLDERS
About course folders
A course folder for each course appears by default under Courses. The default roles that have full
permissions (Read, Write, Manage, and Remove) to this folder when the folder is first created are
Instructors, Teaching Assistants and Course Builders. The Administrator may modify this default.
For example, the Administrator may set it so that when a Course folder is first created, only
Instructors and TAs have full permissions. It is very important to understand which permissions
have been granted to the folder before proceeding with setting up subfolders and additional
permissions.
Any user with Manage permission on the course folder can grant additional permissions on that
folder to other users. An Instructor may want to grant Read permission to all Students in the course
to the course folder, and Read and Write permission to a public folder created beneath the main
course folder.
Storing single course content
The temporary nature of courses makes the course folder (tied to the Course ID) useful for storing
content that is specific to a single course. If a course is removed, the folder tied to the Course ID is
no longer accessible. If content that is stored in the course folder does need to be reused, options
for copying and moving items are available.
It may be easier to store content that is used in multiple courses in the institution folder or the
instructor’s user folder. This also depends on how the Administrator configures the Institution folder
and its availability. Keep in mind that if course-related content is stored in a user folder, and it has
not been shared. This content will be unavailable if the user leaves the institution and is removed
from the system.
Folder examples
Subfolders within the course folder may be used to store both private and public content. The
following are some examples of folders that may be created in the course folder:
Private Folder
A folder shared with the Instructor, Teaching Assistant, and other applicable course roles that
contain private course information, such as test and survey results. These users all have Read,
Write, Manage and Remove permission on the folder.
Note: The Instructor may decide to retain the course folder as a
workspace for the course, and not allow users to access any items in
the course folder. Instead, the Instructor may link to Content Collection
items from the course. In this scenario, the entire course folder would
be a private folder.
Group Folders
Folders shared with course groups, which may be used as group collaboration areas. There are a
few options for setting this up:
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 332 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Grant all Students in the course Read access on the top-level course folder. Remove Read
permission for Students to all private folders. Add permissions for each group to their respective
Group folder. This option allows Students to use the Find Folder tool to locate the Group folder.
Grant each course Group permission to their respective Group folder in the course (do not grant
any permission for course users to the top-level course folder). The Students may use Search, Go
To Location, and Bookmarks to locate the folder.
Public Folder
Folder shared with all course users where they may access course related materials, such as the
syllabus or reading list. There are a few options for setting this up:
•
Grant all Students in the course Read access on the top-level course folder. Remove
Read permission for Students to all private folders. Add permissions for all course users to
the public folder. This option allows Students to use the Find Folder tool to locate the
public folder.
•
Grant all course users permissions to the public folder (do not grant any permission for
course users to the top-level course folder). The Students may use Search, Go To
Location, and Bookmarks to locate the public folder.
USING CONTENT SYSTEM CONTENT
Introduction
Instructors may use items from the Content Collection throughout courses in the Blackboard
Learning System. Files and Portfolios may be linked to from different areas in a course and items
from a course may be added to a folder in the Content Collection.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Add Content
Collection Items to a
Course
Explains how to add items from the Content Collection to a
course.
Add Portfolios to a
Course
Explains how to add Portfolios to a course.
Course Link Checker
Describes how to check permissions for Content Collection
items linked to in a course.
Copy files to the
Content Collection
Explains how to copy files from a course to the Content
Collection.
Content Collection
Items during
Export/Import and
Archive/Restore
Explains how Content Collection items behave when a
course package is imported or restored.
Course Copy and
Content Collection
Items
Explains how Content Collection items function during a
course copy.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 333 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Instructor Manual
Page 334 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD CONTENT SYSTEM ITEMS TO A COURSE
Overview
It is easy for Instructors to quickly add materials stored in the Content Collection to their Blackboard
Learning System courses. Content Collection items are supported as another type of content, such
as Learning Units, that can be added to a course.
Instructors have two options for adding items from the Content Collection to a course. Items may
be added through the Add Content Collection Content option available in Content Areas, or through
the third row action buttons available in the Text Box Editor.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Text Box Editor. The
third row action buttons will not be available if this feature is disabled.
Adding Content System Content to a course
Content Collection Content may be added to any Content Area in a course, such as Course
Information or Course Documents. To add an item from the Content Collection to a Content Area,
follow the steps below:
1.
Open the Control Panel for a course.
2.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents.
3.
Click Add Item. On the Add Item page, select Browse from Link to Content Collection.
Adding a link to a Content System item from the Text Box Editor
Users may add links to items in the Content Collection from the Text Box Editor. Follow the steps
below to add a link to a Content Collection item:
1.
Open the Control Panel for a course.
2.
Open a course area meant to hold content where the Text Box Editor is available, such as
an Announcement or a Discussion Board.
3.
Select an option in the third row of the Text Box Editor.
The Content Collection item to link to is selected on the page that appears. Select Browse next to
the Link from Content Collection field. The Content Collection will open in a new window. Locate
the Content Collection item, select it and click Submit.
It is very important that the Browse field and the Specify URL field are left blank. These fields are
not used for adding items from the Blackboard Content Collection.
Depending on the type of item being added, additional options may also be available on this page.
For more information, see the Text Box Editor topic in this manual.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Text Box Editor Links.
The third row action buttons will not be available if this feature is
disabled.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 335 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Permission granted to items added to Courses
When an item from the Content Collection is added to a course, all users in the course will
automatically be granted Read permission to the item. The Permissions page for the item in the
Content Collection will list All Course Users as having Read permission.
\
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 336 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD PORTFOLIOS TO A COURSE
Overview
It is easy for Instructors to quickly add Portfolios stored in the Content Collection to their
Blackboard Learning System courses. These Portfolios may be viewed by all users enrolled in the
course.
Note: The System Administrator may disable Portfolios. This option will
not be available within courses if this tool is disabled.
Sharing a Portfolio with a course
1.
Portfolios created in the Content Collection may be shared with users in a Blackboard
Learning System course. To share a Portfolio with a course, follow the steps below:
2.
Select folder view for the Content Collection menu.
3.
Under the heading Portfolios, click My Portfolios.
4.
Select Manage next to the Portfolio to share with the course.
5.
Click Share Portfolio.
6.
Select Share with Course from the drop-down list in the Action Bar and click Go.
7.
Enter the Course ID of the course. The Portfolio may be shared with multiple courses;
separate each Course ID with a comma.
8.
A receipt page appears stating which courses were granted access to the Portfolio.
Once a Portfolio is shared, it must be made available in the course before it may be accessed by
users.
Make Portfolios available to users in a course
Portfolios are made available to users in a course through the Course Menu. Before adding
Portfolios to the Course Menu, the Instructor must enable Portfolios in the course. Follow the steps
below:
1.
Select Manage Tools under Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Enable Blackboard Tools.
3.
Select the Availability option next to Portfolios.
4.
Return to the Control Panel.
5.
Select Manage Course Menu under Course Options.
6.
Select Add Tool Area.
7.
Select Portfolio in the Area Type drop-down list and enter a name for the area (for
example, Course Portfolios) in the Area name field. Select the option Make available for
Student/Participant users.
A Course Portfolio area will appear in the Course Menu. Users may view Portfolios that have been
shared with the course in this area.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 337 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Location of Portfolios within Control Panel
All Portfolios that have been shared with a course are located on the Course Portfolios page.
Follow these steps to open the Course Portfolios page.
1.
Open the Control Panel for a Blackboard Learning System course.
2.
Select Course Portfolios under Course Tools.
3.
Select the title of a Portfolio to open and view it.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 338 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE LINK CHECKER
Overview
The Course Link Checker allows Instructors to check the links to Content Collection items that have
been added to a course. For example, if an item in the Content Collection is removed after the
Instructor has created a link to the item in a course, the Course Link Checker will detect this and
make the Instructor aware of the broken link. Depending on the situation, some broken links may
be repaired; while others may not.
When a link to a Content Collection item is added to a course, All Course Users are given Read
permission to this item in the Content Collection. When the Course Link Checker is run, the only
permission that is checked is Read permission for All Course Users.
Enabling the Course Link Checker
Instructors have the option of enabling or disabling the Course Link Checker for each of their
courses. The tool is disabled by default when a course is created. The following steps explain how
to enable the Course Link Checker:
1.
Open the Control Panel for a Blackboard Learning System course.
2.
Select Manage Tools under Course Tools.
3.
Select Enable Blackboard Tools.
4.
Select the check box under Available for Check CS Links and click Submit.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Course Link Checker
for the entire system. This tool will not be available within courses if it is
disabled by the Administrator.
Course areas checked by the Course Link Checker
Items may be added to courses through the Add Content Collection option available in Content
Areas, or through the third row action buttons available in the Text Box Editor. The Course Link
Checker will detect any broken links that appear for content added through the Add Content
Collection option.
The Course Link Checker will detect any broken links added to the following areas through the Text
Box Editor:
•
Content Areas (for example, Course Documents, Course Information, and Assignments)
•
Announcements, Calendar Events and Tasks
•
Learning Units
•
Discussion Boards
Note: Links to Content Collection items added to Assessments
(including Tests, Surveys and Questions Pools) are not checked by the
Course Link Checker.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 339 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
When to use the Course Link Checker
If links to Content Collection items are added to a course, it is important that the Course Link
Checker is run on a periodic basis. This is especially true after a course is copied, restored or
imported. Users with access to the items in the Content Collection may move and remove items, or
modify the permissions on an item. These actions may impact the validity of a link to the item in a
course.
For example, when a link to a Content Collection item is added to a course, all course users are
automatically granted Read permission to the item in the Content Collection. If this permission is
later removed by a user who has Manage permission to the item, selecting the link within the
course will result in an error message.
Steps to use the Course Link Checker
Running the Course Link Checker is a very simple operation.
1.
Open the Control Panel, and select Check CS Links under Course Tools.
2.
Select Submit on the Course Link Checker page. This operation may take a few minutes
to run; the length of the process depends on the number of links within a course.
3.
Read the results and repair broken links
4.
After the Course Link Checker is run, a results page will appear, explaining the status of
each link to a Content Collection item. Some broken links may be fixed by the Instructor,
while others may not.
L EGEND
D ESCRIPTION
AND
R ESOLUTION
Valid Link. These items are linked successfully and do not require any
further action.
Repairable permissions error. All Course Users do not have Read
permission to these Content Collection items. When a user attempts to
access this link in a course, a ‘File Not Found’ error will appear. The
Instructor has Manage permission to the items and can therefore repair
these links. Select the check boxes next to these items and click
Repair. The system will grant Read permission to these items to All
Course Users.
Path not found. The items have been moved, removed or renamed
within the Content Collection. The links are broken and the Instructor
should remove them from the course. If the new locations or names of
the items are known, new links may be created.
Permissions error. The links to the items are valid but All Course
Users do not have Read permission to these Content Collection items.
The Instructor does not have Manage permission to the items and
cannot repair these links. The Instructor should remove these links from
the course or contact a user with Manage permissions to these items to
add the appropriate permission.
COPY FILES TO THE CONTENT COLLECTION
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 340 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Overview
The Copy Files to CS tool enables Instructors to copy content from their courses in the Blackboard
Learning System to a folder in the Content Collection. This is very helpful for Instructors who have
attached files that exist outside of the Content Collection to course Content Areas. Items that are
added through to the Content Collection may be used in new courses, shared with other users, and
added to Portfolios.
This tool is meant for adding new content to the Content Collection; it does not detect Content
Collection items that have been added to a course or make changes to the course itself.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Copy Files to CS tool.
This tool will not be available if it is disabled by the Administrator.
Types of content that may be copied
The Copy Files to CS tool copies files that have been attached to course Content Areas. These
files are originally added the course through the File to Attach option available on specific pages in
the application or the third row action buttons in the Text Box Editor.
The Copy Files to CS tool copies items attached to the following:
•
Content folders
•
Content items
•
Course links
•
Assignments
•
Instructions
•
External links
•
Learning units
Note: All attachments associated with unprotected course cartridges are
copied; protected cartridge content will not be copied.
Types of content that are not copied
Attachments added to the following areas of a course are NOT added to the Content Collection
through the Copy files to CS tool:
•
Attachments added to any Assessment areas (this includes Tests, Surveys and Question
Pools)
•
Attachments added to Discussion Board messages, including Group Discussion Board
messages
•
Files uploaded to the Digital Drop Box by Instructors
•
Items added to the Grade Assignment page by the Instructor are not copied. These items
include comments for a specific user and are sent when the Assignment is graded. (Items
added to the Add Assignment page by an Instructor are copied)
Student files added to a course are also not copied, this includes:
•
Files uploaded to the Digital Drop Box by users
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 341 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
•
Instructor Manual
Files uploaded by users to Assignments
Enabling Copy Files to CS
Instructors have the option of enabling or disabling the Copy Files to CS tool for each of their
courses. The tool is disabled by default when a course is created. Follow the steps below to enable
the Course Link Checker:
•
Open the Control Panel for a course.
•
Select Manage Tools under Course Tools.
•
Select Enable Blackboard Tools.
•
Select the check box under Available for Copy Files to CS and click Submit.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Copy Files to CS for
the entire system. This tool will not be available within courses if it is
disabled by the Administrator.
Using Copy Files to CS
Instructors access the Copy Files to CS tool within the Control Panel of a course.
Follow the steps below to run the Copy Files to CS Tool:
1.
Open the Control Panel, and select Copy Files to CS under Course Tools. The Copy
Files to CS page appears.
2.
In the Select Course Materials, select the check boxes for those areas that will be copied.
In each area selected, attached items will be copied to the Content Collection.
3.
The path in the Destination field defaults to the location of the course folder in Course
Content in the Content Collection. The path to a different folder may be entered.
Note: Users can only copy content to folders within the Content
Collection to which they have Write permission.
4.
A receipt page appears after the copy is complete. The receipt states all areas that were
successfully copied and any that have failed.
5.
The copied items will appear in the Content Collection in a folder named Copied Content.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 342 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
Run the tool multiple times
The Copy Files to CS tool may be run on the same course multiple times. This may be helpful in
the following situations:
•
Too much or too little content was selected to copy and a clean copy is needed.
•
If files were copied at the beginning of the term, the process may need to be run at the
end of the term to copy additional files that have been uploaded.
Each time this tool is run, a new set of folders appears in the Content Collection. If the content is
copied to the same area, for example Course Content, the Copied Content folder is appended with
the number of the copy. For example, the folder created after the tool is run a second time is
named ‘Course ID’ Copied Content (2).
File Structure in the Content Collection
All files copied to the Content Collection are stored in the destination folder selected on the Select
Areas to Copy page. All of the content from the course is stored in a folder with the following
naming convention: ‘Course ID’ Copied Content. The structure of files within Copied Content
mimics the structure of the files in the course.
Example
The copy from History100 included Course Documents and Course Information.
Course Documents folder contained:
•
A course item with the file Syllabus.doc attached
•
A course folder named Chapter One (no items attached to the folder)
•
In the Chapter One folder - A course item with the file WeekOne.doc attached
Course Information folder contained:
A course item with the file CourseOverview.doc attached. The structure of files within the Content
Collection will be as follows:
>History 100 folder
>History100 Copied Content folder
>Course Documents folder
>Syllabus.doc
>Chapter One folder
>WeekOne.doc
>Course Information folder
>CourseOverview.doc
Copying special file attachments
There are a few cases where copied content receives special treatment in the Content Collection:
Content uploaded to the Blackboard Learning System as package files (for example, zip files)
where the user selected to unpackage this file are copied to the Content Collection in the zip file
format with the unpackaged items under a folder with the following format:
dir_fileattachmentname.fileextension. For example, a file called “unzipme.zip” is unpackaged at
the root of the Course Information folder. The Content Collection will have both the unpackage.zip
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 343 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
file at the root of the Course Information folder and also dir_unzipme.zip that contains the contents
of the original file.
All files uploaded through the Text Box Editor are copied to individual subfolders named
embedded(unique#). This is also true for files uploaded through the Text field when the Text Box
Editor is not available.
When an HTML file that contains refrences to images is uploaded, the user is prompted to upload
the images. These are “missing images”. Missing images are copied to a folder with the following
format: dir_fileattachmentname.fileextension.
Copying files with the same name
The Content Collection does not allow a folder to contain multiple files with the same name; this
type of duplication is permitted within courses in the Blackboard Learning System. The same is true
of folders with the same name.
When files and folders with the same name are copied to the same folder in the Content Collection,
the names will be appended with a number. For example, if two files named Syllabus.doc are
copied to the same folder, they will appear as Syllabus.doc and Syllabus1.doc.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 344 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
CONTENT SYSTEM ITEMS DURING EXPORT/IMPORT AND ARCHIVE/RESTORE
Overview
When a course in the Blackboard Learning System is exported or archived, links to any Content
Collection files are included. If a package is then imported or restored, these links are included in
the content. The behavior of these links depends on the state of the items in the Content Collection.
Items remain in the Content Collection
If the items are stored in the same location within the Content Collection, the links to these items in
the course will function properly. The Instructor should check the permissions for these items as
they may need to be updated. Permissions for this item should be granted to the Course User List
so all users enrolled in the course may access the items. If users do not have permissions to the
item, an ‘Access Denied’ error message appears when they select the link.
Items restored or imported to a course without Content Collection installed
If a course package is restored or imported to a course in the Blackboard Learning System and the
Content Collection is not installed, all of the links to Content Collection items in the imported or
restored course will be broken. This is due to the fact that the course saves a link to each item, not
the actual files.
The Instructor should remove the links to these items from the course. If the items are accessible,
they can be added to the Content Collection and linked to again from the course.
Note: If the Content Collection is moved or deleted the same behavior
described above will occur. All of the links to Content Collection items
will be broken.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 345 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
COURSE COPY AND CONTENT SYSTEM ITEMS
Overview
Links to Content Collection items in a course are copied during a course copy operation. Because
links to Content Collection items are copied and not physical files, all users must have permission
within the Content Collection to view these files. Users in the new course will not have the
appropriate permission. When a user without the appropriate permission to the Content Collection
item selects a link to the item in the course, an Access Denied message appears.
The Instructor must add permission for these users to the item in the Content Collection or the
Administrator may enable the Copy Settings options to automatically update permissions when a
course is copied.
Note: The automatic permissions update only applies to courses that
are copied. If a course is imported or restored, user permissions to
Content Collection items linked to in the course are not automatically
updated.above will occur. All of the links to Content Collection items will
be broken.
Automatic permission updates to Content Collection items
A Copy Settings option is available for Administrators to manage the permissions of Content
Collection items that are copied as part of a course copy operation. There are two options the
Administrator may enable in the system; one or both may be enabled. If these options are enabled,
the permissions for Content Collection items located in almost all course areas will be automatically
updated.
•
Update permissions for general links – If this option is selected, all users enrolled in a
copied course automatically receive Read permission to Content Collection items linked to
in the course.
•
Update permissions for e-Reserve links - If this option is selected, all users in a copied
course automatically receive Read permission to e-Reserves items linked to in the course.
Note: The one exception to this is Assessments. The permissions for
Content Collection items linked to in Tests, Surveys, and Questions
Pools are not automatically updated. The Instructor must update the
permissions to these items manually through the Content Collection.
Item permissions in the Content Collection
When a Content Collection item is copied through course copy and the permissions are
automatically updated, the new permissions are visible for the item in the Content Collection. When
the Content Collection item is viewed in the Content Collection, Read permission will appear for All
Course Users.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 346 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
USING LIBRARY CONTENT
About the Library
Instructors can enhance their courses by adding content from the Library. The Library is used to
post eReserves, electronic manuscripts, and other institution resources. It allows seamless
integration with the Blackboard Learning System, making it a powerful way to share and distribute
library materials. This document explains how Instructors can use the library to supplement their
course offerings.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following topics:
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
Library areas
Describes the main areas of the Library.
eReserve folders
Explains how eReserve course folders are
created and their availability.
Add Library content to courses
Describes how to add content from the Library to
a course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 347 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
LIBRARY AREAS
About Library Areas
By default, there are two main areas within the Library, Library Content and eReserves. Additional
areas may also be added to the Library to meet specific institution needs.
Library Content
Library Content may be organized according to the institution’s needs. This area is intended for
content that may be shared across the entire institution.
User access to Library Content
All users have read access to all content within Library Content by default.
Instructor access to Library Content
Instructors may add items from Library Content to courses within the Blackboard Learning System.
eReserves
eReserves are automatically organized by course; each course in the Blackboard Learning System
has a corresponding course in eReserves. eReserves are only available for courses; eReserves
are not available for organizations.
User access to eReserves
All users have automatic read access to eReserves for courses they are enrolled in; eReserve
folders for other courses do not appear in the file tree.
Instructor access to eReserves
Instructors may add items from eReserves to courses within the Blackboard Learning System
Note: eReserves must be enabled by the System Administrator; if the
Administrator does not activate this area it will not appear in the Library.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 348 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ERESERVE FOLDERS
Generating course folders in eReserves
Course folders within eReserves are automatically generated the first time the Instructor, Teaching
Assistant or Course Builder accesses the Content Collection after the course is created. If a course
is added to the Blackboard Learning System, the eReserve course folder will appear to course
users the first time the Instructor accesses the Content Collection.
Course availability and eReserves
The ability to see the course’s eReserve folder when the course is made unavailable depends on
the user’s course role. Instructors, Course Builders, and Teaching Assistants can see the folder
whether the course is available or unavailable. Students can only see the eReserve course folder
when the course is available.
Course removal and eReserves
If a course is removed from the Blackboard Learning System, the eReserve folder, and all of its
content, is also removed.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 349 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
Instructor Manual
ADD LIBRARY CONTENT TO COURSES
Add content from the Library to a course
Instructors may add items from the Library to their course Content Areas. This includes items that
appear in their course folders within eReserves, as well as items from Library Content. Follow the
steps below to add an item from the Library to a course:
1.
Select a course and open the Course Control Panel.
2.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents. The Course Documents page will
appear.
3.
Select Add Content System Content from the drop-down list in the action bar and click
Go. The Add Content Collection Content page will appear.
4.
Complete the Add Content Collection Content page with the following information:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Content Information
Name
Enter a title for the content item. This title will appear in the
course.
Text
Enter a description for the Content item. You may use the Test
Box Editor options to format the text.
Choose Content System Item or Folder
Browse Content
System
Enter the path to the content item in the Library or click Browse
to locate and select the file in a folder within the Library (for
example, Library Content or eReserves).
Name of Link to
Content
Enter the name of the link that users select to access the
attached file.
Options
Do you want to
make the content
visible
Select Yes to make the content available to Students
immediately. Select No to hide the content from Students. If
availability is controlled by date limits, select Yes in this field.
Do you want to
track views
Select Yes to include this item in reports on Student views.
Select No and information about which Students have viewed
the content will not be tracked.
Do you want to
add metadata?
Select Yes to add metadata to the item. Metadata is information
related to the item. In the Blackboard Learning System,
metadata is primarily used to ensure compliance with industry
standards. Select No if you do not wish to add metadata.
Choose date
restrictions
Select Display After and use the drop-down lists to select a
date. This will hide the content until the date selected.
Select Display Until and use the drop-down lists to enter a
date. This will hide the content after the date selected.
The Display After and Display Until features can be combined
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 350 of 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 7.2)
F IELD
Instructor Manual
D ESCRIPTION
to set restrictions for the display the content for a set period of
time.
Instructors also have the option of adding items in the Content Collection to courses through the
Text Box Editor. The Add Item option in the third row action bar of Text Box Editor may be used to
locate and add items in the Content Collection.
Note: Only items within the eReserve course folder that correspond with
that course may be added to the course. Content in eReserve course
folders for other courses you may be teaching may not be added. All
items within Library Content are available to use within a course.
© 2006 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 351 of 351
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement